19.10.2014 Views

The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine

The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine

The higher state educational establishment of Ukraine

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms<br />

Introduction. Phonetics. <strong>The</strong> alphabet. <strong>The</strong><br />

classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants.<br />

Diphthongs. Digraphs. Letter combinations.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> foundation <strong>of</strong> the European civilization is the cultural and scientific heritage <strong>of</strong><br />

the ancient world. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the basic stages <strong>of</strong> the Roman history and the<br />

history <strong>of</strong> Latin language promotes the broadening <strong>of</strong> tne general range <strong>of</strong> interests<br />

<strong>of</strong> students.<br />

<strong>The</strong> learning <strong>of</strong> the Latin alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels,<br />

consonants, diphthongs, digraphs and letter combinations is directed to the forming<br />

<strong>of</strong> the basic pronunciation and graphic habits.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

To know:<br />

- the Latin alphabet;<br />

- the classification <strong>of</strong> sounds;<br />

- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants;<br />

- the diphtongs and their pronunciation;<br />

- the digraphs and their pronunciation;<br />

- the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the letter combinations derived from Greek;<br />

- the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the letter combinations ngu, su, qu, ti;<br />

- the most widely used Greek prefixes and roots which are written with “y”.<br />

To know how:<br />

- to correctly write the Latin letters;<br />

- to explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels, consonants, letter combinations in<br />

the words <strong>of</strong> Latin and Greek origin;<br />

- to correctly write the most widely used Greek prefixes and roots with “y”.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

English language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />

2


and sounds, diphthongs and<br />

monophthongs.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />

should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Alphabet<br />

Diphthong<br />

<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />

order.<br />

A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />

Phoneme<br />

as one sound or one syllable.<br />

<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Phonetics<br />

continuous speech stream.<br />

<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />

linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

language.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What do you know from the history <strong>of</strong> Latin?<br />

2. In what ways did Latin develop after the disintegration <strong>of</strong> the Roman<br />

Empire?<br />

3. What groups <strong>of</strong> terms does medical terminology consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />

4. What do you know about the Latin alphabet?<br />

5. What are diphthongs?<br />

6. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels?<br />

7. What are the spelling and meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek roots and prefixes with<br />

“y”?<br />

8. How are the letter combinations ngu, su, ti, qu pronounced?<br />

9. How are the letter combinations with “h” pronounced?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

3


1. Do exercises 1–5 (pp. 16-17), explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and<br />

consonants, diphthongs.<br />

2. Read correctly the words, underline the Greek prefixes and roots, explain<br />

their meaning: hypogastricus, myologia, polyvaccinum, salicylicus, pyrosis,<br />

otomycosis, dystonia, hypertonicus, glycerinum, oxydatus.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> language <strong>of</strong> medicine is Latin. If doctors from different countries<br />

speaking different languages gather together they can easily understand each other<br />

because all <strong>of</strong> them know Latin. English medical terminology is completely based<br />

on Latin. What is more, 60% <strong>of</strong> English words are derived from Latin. Latin<br />

belongs to Indo-European languages.<br />

From the history <strong>of</strong> Latin<br />

Many years ago before Christ there was a tribe who lived in Latium, the<br />

region which lied in the centre <strong>of</strong> modern Italy. <strong>The</strong> tribe spoke Latin. <strong>The</strong><br />

inhabitants <strong>of</strong> Latium were warlike, they were always at war, took other peoples,<br />

joined others’ territories to their own ones. In the joined territories they thrusted<br />

Latin. Little by little there was created the great and powerful Roman Empire,<br />

which stretched from Great Britain in the north to the Northern Africa in the south<br />

and from Portugal in the west to Asia Minor in the east. <strong>The</strong> population <strong>of</strong> this huge<br />

territory spoke Latin. <strong>The</strong> empire was called Roman because <strong>of</strong> the name <strong>of</strong> its<br />

capital Rome (in Latin Roma) which was founded in the 8-th century B. C.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Roman Empire was existing for more than one thousand years, but<br />

approximately in the fifth century A. D. it disintegrated at first in the West and the<br />

East and later on in separate countries.<br />

After the disintegration <strong>of</strong> the Roman Empire Latin developed in three ways:<br />

1. On the base <strong>of</strong> spoken Latin (sermo vulgaris) there appeared and<br />

developed modern languages <strong>of</strong> Romance group, such as Portuguese, Spanish,<br />

French, Italian, Romanian, Moldavian and some others.<br />

4


2. Latin has become the language <strong>of</strong> science, culture, education and religion.<br />

Such sciences as biology, chemistry, mathematics, law and diplomacy use Latin for<br />

their terms. In Catholic churches the service is conducted in Latin nowadays.<br />

3. Latin together with latinized Greek roots and word-building elements has<br />

become the basis <strong>of</strong> international medical terminology which consists <strong>of</strong> three big<br />

groups <strong>of</strong> terms:<br />

a) anatomic terminology;<br />

b) clinical terminology;<br />

c) pharmaceutical terminology.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet consists <strong>of</strong> 25 letters. <strong>The</strong> sounds which the letters<br />

represent are divided into vowels and consonants. <strong>The</strong>re are six vowels: a, e, i, o, u,<br />

y. Other sounds are consonants.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin alphabet has become the basis <strong>of</strong> alphabets <strong>of</strong> many European<br />

languages. <strong>The</strong> English ABC is almost the same as the Latin one.<br />

Latin <strong>The</strong> name<br />

<strong>The</strong> pronunciation and examples<br />

letters <strong>of</strong> the letter<br />

A a<br />

B b<br />

C c<br />

D d<br />

E e<br />

F f<br />

G g<br />

H h<br />

I i<br />

a<br />

be<br />

tse<br />

de<br />

e<br />

ef<br />

ge<br />

ha<br />

i<br />

[a] atrium (auricle)<br />

[b] bilis (bile or gall)<br />

[ts] cerebrum (brain)<br />

[k] caput (head)<br />

[d] derma (skin)<br />

[e] pes (foot)<br />

[f] flos (flower)<br />

[g] gaster (stomach)<br />

[h] herba (grass)<br />

[i:] intestinum (intestine)<br />

J j jota [j] junctura (junction)<br />

K k ka [k] Kalium (potassium)<br />

5


L l<br />

M m<br />

N n<br />

O o<br />

P p<br />

Q q<br />

R r<br />

S s<br />

T t<br />

U u<br />

V v<br />

X x<br />

Y y<br />

Z z<br />

el<br />

em<br />

en<br />

o<br />

pe<br />

ku<br />

er<br />

es<br />

te<br />

u<br />

ve<br />

iks<br />

ipsilon<br />

or igrek<br />

zeta<br />

[l] labium (lip)<br />

[m] magnus (big)<br />

[n] nasus (nose)<br />

[o] oculus (eye)<br />

[p] pulvis (powder)<br />

is written in the combination with “u” and pronounced<br />

as [kv] aqua (water)<br />

[r] ramus (branch)<br />

[s] sinister (left)<br />

[t] tela (tissue)<br />

[u] usus (use)<br />

[v] valetudo (health)<br />

[ks] radix (root)<br />

[kz] exitus (exit)<br />

[i] zygoma (cheek-bone)<br />

[z] zona (zone)<br />

[ts] Zincum (zinc)<br />

Diphthongs<br />

Diphthongs are combinations <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced as a<br />

single sound or a single syllable. <strong>The</strong>re are four diphthongs in Latin:<br />

Ae and oe which are pronounced as a single sound [e], e. g.: haema (blood),<br />

oedema (oedema).<br />

But if a + e or o + e are not diphthongs, we put two dots above the letter e<br />

and pronounce each vowel separately: aёr (air), poёta (poet);<br />

au is pronounced as ou in house, e. g.: Aurum (gold);<br />

eu as Latin e + u, pronounced rapidly as a single syllable: neurologus<br />

(neurologist).<br />

6


<strong>The</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels<br />

Most <strong>of</strong> consonants and vowels are pronounced as the corresponding letters<br />

<strong>of</strong> the English alphabet. But some <strong>of</strong> them have different phonation depending on<br />

the position in a word:<br />

[ts] before the vowels e, i, y and the diphthongs ae, oe, eu:<br />

cerebrum (brain), caecum (blind gut)<br />

C c<br />

[k] 1) before the vowels a, o, u and the diphthong au: caput<br />

(head), causa (reason);<br />

2) before consonants: cranium (skull);<br />

3)in the end <strong>of</strong> words: lac (milk).<br />

I i<br />

[i] in most <strong>of</strong> words: intestinum (intestine)<br />

[j] in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a syllable before a vowel:<br />

iuvenilis (youthful);<br />

S s<br />

L l<br />

is always pronounced s<strong>of</strong>tly: labium (lip).<br />

[s] sanus (healthy)<br />

[z] 1) between vowels: nasus (nose)<br />

2) between a vowel and consonant m or n:<br />

organismus (organism), extensor (extensor);<br />

[ks] in most <strong>of</strong> words: radix (root);<br />

7


X x<br />

[kz] in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word between vowels: exitus (exit);<br />

Z z<br />

[z] in the words derived from Greek:<br />

zona (zone), zygoma (cheek-bone);<br />

[ts] in the words not derived from Greek:<br />

Zincum (zinc), influenza (influenza).<br />

<strong>The</strong> letter “y”<br />

<strong>The</strong> letter “y” derived from the Greek alphabet is always pronounced [i] and<br />

used in the words and term-forming elements derived from Greek.<br />

It is necessary to pay attention to the spelling and meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek roots<br />

and prefixes widely-used in the medical terminology:<br />

hyper – points to the increase, too much:<br />

hypertonia (the increased blood pressure);<br />

hyp(o) – points to the decrease, reduction:<br />

hypotonia (the decreased blood pressure);<br />

dys – points to the breach, disorder:<br />

dyskinesia (disorder <strong>of</strong> movements);<br />

syn-/sym- – points to the joining, connexion:<br />

symbiosis (co-existence);<br />

poly – means much, many:<br />

polyvitaminum (vitamin complex);<br />

hydr(o) – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> water:<br />

hydrops (dropsy);<br />

ox(y) – means sour, points to the presence <strong>of</strong> oxygen:<br />

oxygenium (oxygen);<br />

8


pyr<br />

my(o)<br />

myk<br />

glyk<br />

-ylcycl<br />

– points to fire, heat:<br />

pyrogenes (causing heat);<br />

– muscle: myologia (science about muscles);<br />

– fungus: mycosis (fungoid disease);<br />

– sweet: glykaemia (sugar in blood);<br />

– this suffixe means substance, matter:<br />

salicylicus (salicylic);<br />

– means circle:<br />

encyclopaedia (encyclopaedia – a circle <strong>of</strong> knowledge).<br />

<strong>The</strong> letter combinations ngu, su, ti, qu.<br />

ngu<br />

[ngu] before consonants: angulus (angle)<br />

[ngv] before vowels: sanguis (blood)<br />

su<br />

[su]<br />

[sv]<br />

before consonants: sulcus (furrow)<br />

before vowels: consuetudo (habit)<br />

ti<br />

[ti] before consonants: tinctura (tincture)<br />

[tsi] before vowels (if before ti there are no letters s, t, x):<br />

injectio (injection), solutio (solution);<br />

but:<br />

combustio (burn), mixtio (mixture)<br />

qu [kv] aqua (water), Quercus (oak-tree), quinque (five)<br />

9


<strong>The</strong> letter combinations with “h”<br />

<strong>The</strong> letter combinations ch, ph, rh, th, sch are written in the words derived<br />

from Greek. <strong>The</strong>y are pronounced in the following way:<br />

ch [kh] Chamomilla (camomile), chole (bile or gall)<br />

ph [f] philosophus (philosopher), pharmacon (medicine)<br />

rh [r] rhaphe (seam), rhizoma (rhizome)<br />

th [t] thorax (chest), thea (tea)<br />

sch [skh] schola (school), schema (diagram, chart)<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Read and explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels, consonants, diphthongs:<br />

1. Ana, dens, pes, flos, manus, apis, avis, aorta, fossa, Salvia, littera, vas,<br />

vena, rete, sapo, pus, frons, dies, bovinus, internus, lien, impar, juventus, iuvare,<br />

linimentum, iacere, Iodum, innominatus, iudicare, injectio, Opium, ligamentum,<br />

fibula, odor, ars, Ferrum, pons, parvus, terra, tuba, regio, tendo.<br />

2. Gaster, digitus, gutta, genu, glycerinum, glandula, gracilis, signatura,<br />

gemma, gelatinosus, vagus;<br />

Homo, herba, hepar, humus, hypnosis, Hippocrates, hirudo, humerus,<br />

Hydrogenium, habere, herpes;<br />

Mel, fel, sal, sol, folium, ala, pulmo, oculus, myologia, longus, latus, oleum,<br />

lupus, locus, cartilago, ligamentum;<br />

Skeleton (skeleton, sceletum, skeletum), kefir, Kalium, keratitis, kephale,<br />

Kaolinum.<br />

10


3. Caries, acidum, bacca, cor, cornu, crus, Cuprum, cutis, clavicula, cavitas,<br />

Calendula, Calcium, occiput, canalis, collega, cellula, costa, color, bucca, coelia;<br />

Accessorius, casus, cataplasma, divisio, basis, nasus, ossa, posterior, saluber,<br />

sapo, spissus, crassus, sensus, transversus, plasma, spasmus;<br />

Externus, maximus, index, nux, simplex, flexor, cortex, mixtus, examinatio,<br />

exitus letalis, exempli causa, laxans, extractum, pix, apex, radix;<br />

Benzoas, trapezius, Zincum, horizontalis, azygos, protozoa, zygoma, zoon,<br />

zoster, zygota, zyma, influenza.<br />

4. Aequalis, haema, aether, caecum, praecipitatus, praesens, peronaeus,<br />

Graecus, sphaera, diaeta, praescribere, vertebrae;<br />

Coeliacus, foetor, lagoena, foetus, poena, oedema, coelia;<br />

Auditivus, trauma, cauda, clausus, gaudere, fauces, nausea, nauta, auris;<br />

Neurologia, pharmaceuta, genus neutrum, leucocytus, Eucalyptus.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Read and explain the pronunciation <strong>of</strong> letter combinations:<br />

1. Chole, bronchus, cholecystis, charta, stomachus, cochlear, Chelidonium,<br />

chloridum, chorda, ischuria, schema, concha;<br />

Encephalon, aphonia, nephritis, diaphragma, pharynx, phosphas, phalanx,<br />

pharmacon, xiphoideus;<br />

Ichthyolum, asthenia, asthma, athleta, thyreoideus, <strong>The</strong>rmopsis,<br />

ethmoidalis, labyrinthus, aethylicus, phthisis;<br />

Rhaphe, rhis, Rheum, rhomboideus, rhizoma, rhexis, rhachis, Rhamnus,<br />

rhythmicus.<br />

2. Distinguere, sublingualis, singularis, angulus, pinguis, lingua, unguentum,<br />

ungula;<br />

Squamosus, quantitas, qualitas, quantum satis, antiquus, liquidus,<br />

quanterni, utraque, frequens, obliquus, quotidie, liquor, aqua;<br />

11


Repetito, palpatio, tinctura, festinare, constituens, ostium, titillatio,<br />

inflammatio, combustio, mixtio;<br />

Consuetudo, suaviter, sua sponte, suus, suadere, sulcus, suum cuique.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Which <strong>of</strong> the given consonants have the double pronunciation:<br />

a) l; b) k; c) s; d) x; e) h; f) z; g) c.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Determine how the italicized letters (letter combinations) are pronounced:<br />

1) aёr 6) Iodum<br />

2) aeger 7) exitus<br />

3) iugularis 8) Aloё<br />

4) lagoena 9) Xer<strong>of</strong>ormium<br />

5) oxydum 10) paediater<br />

<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) ae; b) oe; c) e; d) i; e) j; f) ks; g) kz.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

12


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms<br />

Phonetics. Long and short syllables. <strong>The</strong> stress.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> successful mastering <strong>of</strong> any language including Latin is conditioned by the<br />

grade <strong>of</strong> mastering <strong>of</strong> phonetic and pronouncing rules, i. e. the rules <strong>of</strong> pronuciation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the sounds and their letter correspondences, the rules <strong>of</strong> the stress, and also the<br />

skills to use the acquired knowledge in practice: to read, to put the stress, to write.<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

To know the rules:<br />

<strong>of</strong> dividing words into syllables in Latin;<br />

<strong>of</strong> long syllables;<br />

<strong>of</strong> short syllables;<br />

<strong>of</strong> the stress in Latin;<br />

the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> stress in the words derived from Greek with the suffix -ia.<br />

To know how:<br />

to read;<br />

to divide words into syllables;<br />

to determine whether the penult is long or short;<br />

to put the stress in the words derived from Latin or Greek.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language, English language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Words in English and Russian are<br />

pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />

syllable, which is called “stress”<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />

should master while training for the studies.<br />

3


Term<br />

Definition<br />

Stress<br />

Penult<br />

Antepenult<br />

Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />

words.<br />

Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />

Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How is a word divided into syllables?<br />

2. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> stress in Latin?<br />

3. When is the penult long?<br />

4. When is the penult short?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Learn the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and shorts syllables (pp. 18-20).<br />

2. Do exercises 1, 2 (p. 20), explain the place <strong>of</strong> stress in the words.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> Stress<br />

In order to put stress correctly it is necessary to divide a word into syllables.<br />

In Latin as in English, a word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs.<br />

E. g.: me-di-ca-men-tum.<br />

In dividing a word into syllables:<br />

1. Two contiguous vowels or a vowel and a diphthong are separated: dies, dies;<br />

fasciae, fas-ci-ae.<br />

4


2. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second vowel:<br />

amicus, a-mi-cus.<br />

3. When two or more consonants stand between two vowels, generally only<br />

the last consonant goes with the second vowel: Ferrum, Fer-rum; cervix, cer-vix;<br />

ligamentum, li-ga-men-tum. However, a stop (p, b, d, t, c, g) + a liquid (l, r) count<br />

as a single consonant and go with the following vowel: vertebra, ver-te-bra;<br />

centimetrum, cen-ti-me-trum. Also counted as single consonants are qu and ch, ph,<br />

rh, th, which should never be separaited in syllabification: reliquus, re-li-quus;<br />

trochanter, tro-chan-ter; encephalon, en-ce-pha-lon.<br />

Words in Latin, like those in English, are pronounced with extra emphasis on<br />

one syllable; the placement <strong>of</strong> this “stress accent” in Latin follows these strict and<br />

simple rules:<br />

1. In a word <strong>of</strong> two syllables the accent always falls on the first syllable: homo,<br />

ca-put, sae-pe.<br />

2. In a word <strong>of</strong> three or more syllables:<br />

a) the accent falls on the next to last syllable (sometimes called the “penult”),<br />

if that syllable is long (ser-vá-re, for-tú-na, me-di-ca-mén-tum);<br />

b) the accent falls on the syllable before that (the “antepenult”), if the penult<br />

is short (éx-tra-ho, phi-ló-so-phus, cá-li-dus, vér-te-bra).<br />

Vowels in long syllables are marked with a “macron” or “long mark” (e. g.:<br />

ā). Vowels in short syllables are marked with a “small arch” (e. g.: ă).<br />

<strong>The</strong> penult is long:<br />

a) if it contains a diphthong: diāēta (diet);<br />

b) if a vowel stands before two or more consonants: ligamēntum (chord);<br />

c) if a vowel stands before x or z: reflēxus (reflex), Oryza (rice);<br />

d) if it contains a “long suffix” such as āl, ār, āt, ūr, ūt, īn, ōs: oblongātus<br />

(oblong), cultūra (cultivation), contagiōsus (infectious).<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> penult is short:<br />

b) if a vowel stands before another vowel or “h”: ĕa fov (pit), e xtrăho (I<br />

extract);<br />

c) if a vowel stands before the letter combinations ch, ph, rh, th: stomăchus<br />

(stomach), philosŏphus (philosopher);<br />

d) if a vowel stands before the combination <strong>of</strong> a stop (b, p, d, t, c, g) with a<br />

liquid (r, l): centimĕtrum (centimetre), palpebra (eyelid);<br />

e) if it contains a “short suffix” such as ǔl, cǔl, ŏl, ǐl, bǐl, ǐd, ǐc: muscŭlus<br />

(muscle), calǐdus (hot), sanabǐlis (curable).<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Determine whether the penult is long or short:<br />

lambdoideus, myocardium, subrotundus, Viburnum, superficies, contraho,<br />

adultus, diversus, Belladonna, expiratio, Oryza, sinister, tussis, axis, cervix, sagitta,<br />

Chamomilla, vertebra, tabuletta, , idaeus, reliquus, exemplum.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Determine the long and short suffixes:<br />

globulus, gelatinosus, analgeticus, auricularis, scapula, vaselinum, calidus,<br />

utilis, lumbalis, mobilis, locatus, pilula, coronalis, solidus, umbilicus, cardiacus,<br />

innominatus, lingula, maxillaris, cultura, validus, oleosus, foveola, dilutus, solutus,<br />

clavicula.<br />

6


B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the stressed syllables:<br />

vertebra; maxilla; glutaeus; limpidus; tunica; cavernosus; incisura; dilutus;<br />

ventriculus; stomachus; apertura, capitulum; pelvinus; cerebrum; acidum.<br />

a) penult; b) antepenult.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

7


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />

the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion “scientific term”. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms. <strong>The</strong> grammatical<br />

categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the description <strong>of</strong><br />

declensions, the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> nouns, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the nominative<br />

and genitive cases, their part in the construction<br />

<strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute, the ways <strong>of</strong><br />

translation.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />

concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong> science, production or arts. <strong>The</strong> modern medical<br />

terminology consists <strong>of</strong> three basic groups <strong>of</strong> terms:<br />

1) anatomic and histologic; 2) clinical; 3) pharmaceutical.<br />

Anatomic and histologic terminologies are studied according to International<br />

Parisian nomenclature, which was approved at the 6-th International Congress <strong>of</strong> anatomists<br />

in Paris in 1955.<br />

<strong>The</strong> base <strong>of</strong> anatomic terminology is a nom. <strong>The</strong> studying <strong>of</strong> the grammatical<br />

categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> the writing <strong>of</strong> nouns in the vocabulary, the<br />

forming <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong> determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, gender and declension allow the<br />

students to master the anatomic terminology.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> the writing <strong>of</strong> nouns<br />

in the vocabulary, <strong>of</strong> the determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, gender and declension.<br />

2. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> forming and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the construction<br />

“the non-agreed attribute”.<br />

3. To be able to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />

4. To be able to write nouns in the vocabulary form.<br />

5. To be able to make up and translate anatomic terms with the non-agreed<br />

attribute from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

3.1 Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

3


the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />

should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Term.<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />

name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />

science, production or arts.<br />

2. Gender.<br />

Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />

genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />

3. Number.<br />

When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />

when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />

4. Case.<br />

plural.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

5. Declension.<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

6. Stem.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What are the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun?<br />

4


2. How is the declension <strong>of</strong> a noun determined?<br />

3. How is the gender <strong>of</strong> a noun determined?<br />

4. What is the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> a noun?<br />

5. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> a noun found?<br />

6. What is the non-agreed attribute?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English:<br />

1) manubrium sterni;<br />

2) cavitas cranii;<br />

3) tuberositas costae;<br />

4) apex pulmonis;<br />

5) corpus vertebrae;<br />

6) radix dentis;<br />

7) musculi abdominis;<br />

8) foramen mandibulae.<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin :<br />

1) body <strong>of</strong> the rib;<br />

2) angle <strong>of</strong> the sternum;<br />

3) arch <strong>of</strong> the aorta;<br />

4) incisure <strong>of</strong> the scapula;<br />

5) base <strong>of</strong> the skull;<br />

6) body <strong>of</strong> the tongue;<br />

7) tubercle <strong>of</strong> the upper jaw;<br />

8) cavity <strong>of</strong> the mouth.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents.<br />

5


Graph № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histologic terms<br />

one-word two-word many-word<br />

dens<br />

capitulum<br />

frontozysamaticus<br />

corpus vertebrae<br />

atrium dextrum<br />

fovea capitis<br />

fenoris<br />

nervus petrosus<br />

minor etc.<br />

Graph № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical<br />

categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />

gender number case<br />

m f n Sing. Plur. Nominativus<br />

Genetivus<br />

Dativus<br />

Accusativus<br />

Ablativus<br />

Vocativus<br />

6


Graph № 3<br />

Declension I II III IV V<br />

Gender f m<br />

n<br />

Case Nom. sing. -a -us -<br />

endings<br />

um<br />

-er -<br />

on<br />

m f m<br />

f<br />

n n<br />

Different -us - -es<br />

u<br />

Gen. sing. -ae -i -is -us -ei<br />

Graph № 4<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> nouns<br />

a noun in Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

sing.<br />

Gender<br />

sing.<br />

ending<br />

costa,<br />

ae<br />

f<br />

nervus,<br />

i<br />

m<br />

cavum,<br />

i<br />

n<br />

apex,<br />

icis<br />

m<br />

arcus,<br />

us<br />

m<br />

genu,<br />

us<br />

n<br />

facies,<br />

ei<br />

f<br />

7


Graph № 5<br />

Finding <strong>of</strong> the stem <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />

by dropping the genitive<br />

singular ending<br />

Nom. Sing. Gen. sing. Stem<br />

costa<br />

nervus<br />

cavum<br />

apex<br />

cartilago<br />

os<br />

arcus<br />

genu<br />

facies<br />

cost –ae<br />

nerv –i<br />

cav –i<br />

apic –is<br />

cartilagin –is<br />

oss –is<br />

arc –us<br />

gen –us<br />

faci –ei<br />

cost –<br />

nerv –<br />

cav –<br />

apic –<br />

cartilagin –<br />

oss –<br />

arc –<br />

gen –<br />

faci –<br />

Graph № 6<br />

<strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute<br />

SN + SG<br />

dentis<br />

fovea<br />

a pit <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />

dental pit<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

№1<br />

Translate into Latin and determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

crest, edge, process, suture, foot, angle, bone, palate, horn, lung.<br />

№2<br />

8


Find the stem <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

phalanx, n gis f; labium, i n; Sinus, us m; cavitas, atis f; musculus, i m; genu, ics n;<br />

cartilage, inis f; thorax, acis m; fibula, ae f; dens, dentis m; cor, cordis n.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

№1<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) collum, i . . .; 2) radix, icis . . .; 3) tractor, us . . .; 4) pes, pedis . . .; 5) systema,<br />

atis . . .; 6) skeleton, i . . .; 7) foveola, ae . . .; 8) ductus, us . . .; 9) oculus, i . . .; 10)<br />

squama, ae . . .; 11) facies, ei . . .; 12) basis, is . . ..<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />

№2<br />

Add the Gen. sing. endings to the following nouns:<br />

1) museulus a) ae<br />

2) pulmo b) i<br />

3) costa c) is<br />

4) genu d) us<br />

5) tuberculum e) ei<br />

6) species<br />

7) arcus<br />

8) ganglion<br />

9) foramen<br />

10) facies<br />

Literature<br />

Basic:<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin Language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />

division into groups.<br />

<strong>The</strong> gender endings, the determination <strong>of</strong> stem.<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> medical terms are attribute constructions, i. e. the<br />

word-combinations consisting <strong>of</strong> a noun and one or several adjectives.<br />

Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

adjectives in the vocabulary, finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the principles <strong>of</strong><br />

agreement with nouns, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translation and use <strong>of</strong> some adjectives in<br />

medical terminology is directed to the forming <strong>of</strong> making up, translation and use<br />

habits <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To be acquainted with the principle <strong>of</strong> division <strong>of</strong> Latin adjectives into<br />

groups.<br />

2. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />

3. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />

4. To learn to write down adjectives in the vocabulary form.<br />

5. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the adjectives major, ius; minor, us in<br />

medical terminology.<br />

6. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns.<br />

7. To know how to translate terminological word-combinations from Latin<br />

into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />

adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />

the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Vocabulary form<br />

2. Stem<br />

3. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> adjectives includes the full<br />

masculine form and the feminine and neuter endings.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />

inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What groups are Latin adjectives divided into?<br />

2. Characterize the first group <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

3. Characterize the second group <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

4. Characterize the adjectives with the suffixes –ior (m, f) and –ius (n).<br />

5. How is an adjective agreed with its noun?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. a) Write down the abbreviated form <strong>of</strong> the adjectives. b) Write the<br />

adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first and second groups separately:<br />

1). Longus, longa, longum. 2). Frontalis, frontalis, frontale. 3). Ruber, rubra,<br />

rubrum. 4). Simplex, simplĭcis. 5). Saluber, salubris, salubre. 6). Cavus, cava,<br />

cavum. 7). Lateralis, lateralis, laterale. 8). Silvester, silvestris, silvestre. 9).<br />

Biceps, bicipĭtis. 10). Asper, aspěra, aspěrum. 11). Brevis, brevis, breve.<br />

12). Sinister, sinistra, sinistrum. 13). Nasalis, nasalis, nasale. 14). Rectus,<br />

recta, rectum. 15). Parvus, parva, parvum.<br />

4


2. Translate the terms into English, write down and memorize the vocabulary<br />

form:<br />

I. 1). Columna vertebralis. 2). Processus spinōsus. 3). Canalis<br />

sacralis. 4). Cornu coccygeum. 5). Costa vera, costa spuria. 6).<br />

Os occipitale. 7). Foramen magnum. 8). Pars basilaris. 9). Genu<br />

dextrum. 10). Atrium sinistrum.<br />

II. 1). Processus alveolaris. 2). Foramen palatīnum. 3). Crista<br />

palatina. 4). Facies nasalis. 5). Alveolus dentalis. 6). Facies<br />

maxillaris. 7). Os zygomaticum. 8). Tuberosĭtas masseterĭca. 9).<br />

Palātum osseum. 10). Musculus massēter. 11). Dens cariōsus.<br />

12). Regio buccalis.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Latin adjectives are divided into two groups:<br />

1) the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first and second declensions;<br />

2) the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the third declension.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group have three gender endings:<br />

-us, -er (m)<br />

-a (f)<br />

-um (n)<br />

So, the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group have the same endings as the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

corresponding declensions:<br />

masculinum femininum neutrum <strong>The</strong> vocabulary form and<br />

translation<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>undus pr<strong>of</strong>unda pr<strong>of</strong>undum pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um – deep<br />

purus<br />

pura<br />

purum purus, a, um – clean<br />

dexter dextra dextrum dexter, tra, trum – right<br />

liber<br />

libĕra libĕrum liber, a, um – free<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> feminine adjectives (-a) are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension,<br />

the masculine (-us, -er) and neuter (-um) adjectives are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

second declension.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjectives <strong>of</strong> the second group (the third declension) are divided into<br />

three subgroups:<br />

1) the adjectives with three gender endings:<br />

-er (m), -is (f), -e (n)<br />

saluber, salubris, salubre – curative, healing (the vocabulary form – saluber, bris,<br />

bre);<br />

2) the adjectives with two gender endings:<br />

-is (m, f), -e (n)<br />

dentalis, dentale – dental<br />

(the vocabulary form – dentalis, e);<br />

brevis, breve – short<br />

(the vocabulary form – brevis, e);<br />

3) the adjectives with one ending r, s or x which is common for all genders,<br />

e. g.:<br />

recens – fresh<br />

simplex – simple<br />

par – equal<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> these adjectives is like that <strong>of</strong> nouns, i. e. Nom. And<br />

Gen. sing. are indicated:<br />

recens, ntis (recens, recentis)<br />

simplex, icis (simplex, simplicis)<br />

par, paris<br />

<strong>The</strong>re is a separate group <strong>of</strong> the third declension consisting <strong>of</strong> the adjectives<br />

with suffixes –ior (m, f) and –ius (n), in Gen. sing. – iōris. <strong>The</strong>se suffixes point to<br />

6


the comparative degree <strong>of</strong> an adjective, but in anatomic nomenclature they are used<br />

in the meaning <strong>of</strong> the positive degree:<br />

superior, superius (superior, ius) – upper;<br />

inferior, inferius (inferior, ius) – lower;<br />

anterior, anterius (anterior, ius) – front;<br />

posterior, posterius (posterior, ius) – back, rear.<br />

E. g.: membrum superius (inferius) – upper (lower) extremity; arcus anterior<br />

– front arc; facies articularis posterior – back joint surface.<br />

In anatomic terminology the adjectives major (m, f), maius (n) – big, large<br />

and minor (m, f), minus (n) – little, small are used to designate the objects forming<br />

a pair:<br />

circulus sanguinis major et minor – systemic or greater circulation and<br />

pulmonary or lesser circulation;<br />

pelvis major et minor – big and small pelvis.<br />

To designate the objects non forming a pair the positive degree <strong>of</strong> these<br />

adjectives is used: magnus, a, um – big and parvus, a, um – small.<br />

E. g.: foramen occipitale magnum – big occipital foramen, arteria parva – small<br />

artery.<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

<strong>The</strong> normal role <strong>of</strong> adjectives is to accompany nouns and to modify, or<br />

limit, them in size, color, texture, character and so on; and, like nouns, adjectives<br />

are declined. Naturally, therefore, an adjective agrees with its noun in gender,<br />

number and case. More <strong>of</strong>ten the adjective follows the noun. <strong>The</strong> adjective with<br />

respect to the noun is called the agreed attribute.<br />

E. g.:<br />

1) ligamentum, i n latus, a, um<br />

ligamentum latum – wide ligament<br />

2) dens, dentis m cariosus, a, um<br />

7


dens cariosus – carious tooth<br />

3) regio, onis f frontalis, e<br />

regio frontalis – frontal region<br />

4) musculus, i m pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um<br />

musculus pr<strong>of</strong>undus – deep muscle<br />

5) os, ossis n longus, a, um<br />

brevis, e<br />

os longum – long bone<br />

os breve – short bone<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Add the ending <strong>of</strong> feminine and neuter genders to the following adjectives:<br />

transversus, costalis, verus, celer, ethmoidalis, teres, ĭcus, opt dexter, acer,<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>undus, par, liber, dentatus, dorsalis, medianus, cutaneus.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1. Simple joint, compound joint. 2. Transverse ligament. 3. Transverse nerve.<br />

4. Hollow vein. 5. Left atrium. 6. Gallbladder. 7. Right kidney. 8. Cervical vertebra.<br />

9. Long bone. 10. Right part.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the group <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

8


1) sacralis, e; 2) recens, ntis; 3) acutus, a, um; 4) latus, a, um; 5) niger, gra,<br />

grum; 6) alveolaris, e; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) lateralis, e; 9) simplex, icis; 10) acer,<br />

acris, acre; 11) dentalis, e; 12) asper, era, erum.<br />

a) 1-st group; b) 2-nd group.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Choose the correct variant <strong>of</strong> agreement:<br />

I.<br />

1) scapula, ae f<br />

2) ventriculus, i m a) sinister<br />

3) atrium, i n b) sinistra<br />

4) pes, pedis m c) sinistrum<br />

5) manus, us<br />

6) ren, renis m<br />

II.<br />

1) os, ossis n<br />

2) incisura, ae f a) lacrimalis<br />

3) canalis, is m b) lacrimale<br />

4) sacculus, i m<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />

1. Os breve a) optic axis<br />

2. Palatum durum b) dry skin<br />

3. Membrum sinistrum c) lymphatic vessel<br />

4. Pulmo dexter d) short bone<br />

5. Ligamentum flavum e) white line<br />

6. Axis opticus f) hard palate<br />

7. Margo interosseus g) right lung<br />

9


8. Cutis sicca h) interosseal edge<br />

9. Linea alba i) left extremity<br />

10. Vas lymphaticum j) yellow ligament<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms”<br />

Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological<br />

terms<br />

<strong>The</strong> morphological structure <strong>of</strong> two- and many-word<br />

anatomic term with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes. <strong>The</strong><br />

current test control<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Each anatomic designation serves to mark the corresponding anatomic<br />

formation. This designation should be exact, monosemantic and involving all<br />

necessary signs <strong>of</strong> the anatomic formation. <strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

terms are two- and many-word formations. Without understanding the structure <strong>of</strong><br />

a term it is impossible to learn to make up and translate anatomic terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know:<br />

- grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />

- grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives;<br />

- the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the practical stem <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />

- the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives;<br />

- the principles <strong>of</strong> forming the construction “non-agreed attribute”;<br />

- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translating the construction “non-agreed attribute” from<br />

Latin into English and from English into Latin;<br />

- the principles <strong>of</strong> forming the construction “agreed attribute”;<br />

- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translating the construction “agreed attribute”.<br />

2. To know how:<br />

- to determine the structure <strong>of</strong> two- and many-word anatomic term with<br />

different types <strong>of</strong> attributes;<br />

- to translate many-word anatomic terms from Latin into English;<br />

- to translate many-word anatomic terms from English into Latin.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

3.1 Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />

3


and an adjective, the description <strong>of</strong><br />

declensions, the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />

noun and the adjective stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Term.<br />

2. Gender.<br />

3. Number.<br />

4. Case.<br />

5. Declension.<br />

6. Stem.<br />

7. <strong>The</strong> non-agreed attribute.<br />

8. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute.<br />

Definition<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />

name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />

science, production or arts.<br />

Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />

genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />

When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />

when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />

plural.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> noun in genitive case is called the non-agreed<br />

attribute.<br />

4


<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What is a term?<br />

2. What structural kinds <strong>of</strong> anatomic terms do you know? Characterize<br />

each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />

3. What parts do two-word terms consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />

4. What parts do three-word and many-word terms consist <strong>of</strong>?<br />

5. What is the word-order in many-word anatomic and histological terms?<br />

6. What is the word-order in many-word pharmaceutical terms?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Translate the terms into English, write down and memorize the vocabulary<br />

form:<br />

I. 1). Sulcus sinus sigmoidei. 2). Nervus petrōsus minor. 3). Facies<br />

II.<br />

costalis anterior. 4). Pelvis major. 5). Pelvis minor. 6). Fovea cap ĭtis<br />

femŏris. 7). Forāmen venae cavae. 8). Atrium dextrum. 9). Basis<br />

cordis. 10). Arteria pulmonālis sinistra. 11). Vesīca urinaria. 12).<br />

Vesīca fellea.<br />

1). Forāmen apĭcis dentis. 2). Nervus palatīnus major. 3). Corpus<br />

mandibulae. 4). Pars alveolaris. 5). Forāmen mandibulae. 6). Os<br />

hyoideum. 7). Arcus zygomaticus. 8). Sutura palatīna transversa. 9).<br />

Apex dentis. 10). Radix dentis. 11). Foramen caecum linguae. 12).<br />

Palatum durum. 13). Palatum molle. 14). Frenulum labii superiōris.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />

concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong> science, production or arts.<br />

By structure anatomic terms may be one-word, two-word or many-word.<br />

5


One-word terms may be:<br />

a) single-root (a noun or a substantivized noun): caput (head), dens (tooth),<br />

ren (kidney), stoma (mouth), caecum (blind gut);<br />

b) derivative terms, formed by suffixation or prefixation: capit-ul-um (small<br />

head), dent-al-is (dental);<br />

c) compound terms, formed by composition <strong>of</strong> two or more stems: front-ozygomaticus<br />

(frontal-malar), zygomatic-o-maxillaris (malar-maxillary).<br />

Two-word terms comsist <strong>of</strong> a noun and an attribute (agreed or non-agreed):<br />

tunica mucosa (mucous membrane), lobus inferior (lower lobe), corona<br />

dentis (a crown <strong>of</strong> tooth), apex pulmonis (a top <strong>of</strong> a lung).<br />

Three-word and many-word terms consist <strong>of</strong> a noun and attributes (agreed or<br />

non-agreed). In anatomic and histological term-systems mixed constructions are<br />

used. In them the non-agreed attribute usually follows the agreed one: corpus<br />

adiposum buccae (adipose body <strong>of</strong> the cheek), foramen caecum linguae (a blind<br />

foramen <strong>of</strong> the tongue), but frenulum labii inferioris (the fraenum <strong>of</strong> the lower lip).<br />

N. B. In pharmaceutical terminology the non-agreed attribute is usually<br />

followed by the agreed one: tinctura Valerianae aetherea (ethereal tincture <strong>of</strong><br />

valerian).<br />

If a noun has several agreed attributes, they are placed according to the<br />

importance <strong>of</strong> an object’s definition. <strong>The</strong> attribute which points to the form<br />

(rotundus, ovalis, quadratus etc.), to the size (magnus, major, minor etc.), to the<br />

colour (flavus, albus etc.) and to the location (dexter, sinister, superior, inferior,<br />

lateralis etc.) is usually put in the last place. <strong>The</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> such construction<br />

into English begins from the end <strong>of</strong> a many-word term. E. g.: arcus dentalis<br />

superior – the upper dental arch.<br />

In many-word terms there may be two nouns, each <strong>of</strong> them with its attributes<br />

(agreed or non-agreed):<br />

facies articularis tuberculi costae – a joint surface <strong>of</strong> the tubercle <strong>of</strong> the rib;<br />

6


tunica mucosa vesicae felleae – a mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task №1<br />

Translate the anatomical terms into English:<br />

membrum superius sinistrum; sulcus sinus sigmoidei; lamina arcus vertebrae;<br />

tuberculum obturatorium anterius; tunica mucosa vesicae felleae; plica venae<br />

cavae; apex partis petrosae; tuba auditiva; plicae tunicae mucosae vesicae felleae.<br />

Task №2<br />

Translate the anatomical terms into Latin:<br />

true ribs; mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the tongue; transverse nerve <strong>of</strong> the neck; fossa <strong>of</strong><br />

the gallbladder; right coronary artery; deep incisure <strong>of</strong> the scapula; plica <strong>of</strong> the left<br />

hollow vein; incisure <strong>of</strong> the heart apex.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test №1<br />

Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />

1) meatus acusticus cartilagineus externus a) fingers <strong>of</strong> the left foot<br />

2) musculus transversus linguae b) foramen <strong>of</strong> the apex <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />

3) arteria circumflexa scapulae c) deltoid tuberosity <strong>of</strong> the<br />

humerus<br />

4) digiti pedis sinistri d) basal part <strong>of</strong> the occipital bone<br />

5) tuberositas deltoidea humeri e) internal base <strong>of</strong> the skull<br />

6) margo partis petrosae f) small horn <strong>of</strong> the hyoid bone<br />

7) foramen apicis dentis g) transverse muscle <strong>of</strong> the tongue<br />

8) basis cranii interna h) edge <strong>of</strong> the petrosal part<br />

7


9) pars basilaris ossis occipitalis i) external cartilaginous acoustic<br />

passage<br />

10) cornu minus ossis hyoidei j) circumflex artery <strong>of</strong> the<br />

scapula<br />

Test №2<br />

Add the corresponding ending instead <strong>of</strong> the dots:<br />

1) apertura sin … sphenoidalis<br />

2) basis ossis sacr …<br />

3) lamina et foramin … cribrosa<br />

4) oss … membri superioris<br />

5) facies articularis tuberculi cost …<br />

6) facies posterior part … petrosae<br />

7) pediculus arc … vertebrae<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) –us; b) –i; c) –is; d) –a; e) –ae.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic:<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin Language and the fundamentals<br />

<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />

<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />

2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko<br />

8


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

chair<br />

and<br />

_____________<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />

2


Module №1<br />

Content module №2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />

building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />

<strong>The</strong> first declension nouns.<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> expressions.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension.<br />

<strong>The</strong> most common prepositions with Acc. and<br />

Abl.<br />

Practical exercises.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> considerable number <strong>of</strong> the key anatomic, histologic, clinical and<br />

pharmaceutical terms are the first declension nouns.<br />

Mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical minimum, case endings, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />

nouns helps to replenish the vocabulary, forms the habits <strong>of</strong> grammatical correct<br />

use <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and the finite terms-elements are the<br />

terminological base <strong>of</strong> clinical terms. In order to memorize the clinical terms it is<br />

necessary to learn to analyze them by word-forming elements (rood, suffix, prefix,<br />

3


stem, ending), to be able to determine the origin <strong>of</strong> a word, to understand the<br />

meaning <strong>of</strong> the word-forming elements.<br />

<strong>The</strong> important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic are prepositions, because the termspreposition<br />

constructions take a significant glace in the anatomic, clinical and<br />

pharmaceutical terminology.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the typical sign <strong>of</strong> the first declension nouns, the paradigm, the<br />

peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns.<br />

2. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension.<br />

3. To know the basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming medical terms.<br />

4. To know what cases are governed by the Latin prepositions, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />

using the prepositions in and sub.<br />

5. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first declension nouns and the finite<br />

terms-elements <strong>of</strong> the first declension.<br />

6. To know how to agree the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group with the 1-st declension<br />

nouns.<br />

7. To know how to translate the terms, including those which contain prepositions,<br />

from Latin into English and on the contrary, to determine the vocabulary from <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns and adjectives.<br />

8. To understand the meaning <strong>of</strong> the Greek and Latin elements <strong>of</strong> which the terms are<br />

formed.<br />

9. To know how to make up the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> the separate terms-elements, to<br />

translate the terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

4


determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the student<br />

should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> finding gender, declension and stem <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />

2. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in the vocabulary.<br />

3. Designate the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension nouns, give the examples <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns in the vocabulary form.<br />

4. Designate the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong><br />

writing them in the vocabulary.<br />

5. Designate the rules <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with nouns.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

5


1. Decline:<br />

a) costa vera (true rib)<br />

b) aqua Menthae (mint water)<br />

c) sutura palatine mediana (middle palatine suture)<br />

2. Translate the word-combinations Latin:<br />

a) spongious substante<br />

b) external plate<br />

c) good colleague<br />

d) experienced oculist<br />

3. Translate the word-combinations with prepositions in and sub into Latin:<br />

a) under the tongue (Acc. Abl.)<br />

b) into water, in water<br />

с) in external plate<br />

d) in capsules, in tablets, in ampules<br />

4. Determine the forming stems and Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the given Greek words:<br />

myelos, phyfon, phleps, uron, cystis, gyne, physis.<br />

5. Make analysis, translate the terms into English:<br />

adenectopia, blepharoplegia, cystographia, spondylomalacia, sialorrhoea,<br />

mastopathia, uraemia, glossalgia, cholecysfotomia, hydrotherapia.<br />

6. Make up the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />

I. 1) gloss (o) – (-algia, -ectomia, -pathia, -plegia, -scopia)<br />

2) myel (o) – (-cele, -graphia, -pathia, -odynia)<br />

3) phleb (o) – (-logia, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhogia, -ectasia)<br />

II. 1) –tomia (phleb-, cholecyst-, tonsilt-, spondyl-, blephar-)<br />

2) –logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, aeti-, hist-)<br />

3) –algia (mast-, cyst-, aden-, blephar-, cholecyst-)<br />

6


7. Make up the terms with the given meaning:<br />

1) hydor, hydr – (water): treatment with water, watery wine, water in the blood<br />

2) cystis, cyst – (bladder): examination <strong>of</strong> the bladder, section <strong>of</strong> the bladder,<br />

paralysis <strong>of</strong> the bladder<br />

3) cholecystis, cholecyst – (gall-bladder): dilation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder, extraction <strong>of</strong><br />

the gall-bladder, disease <strong>of</strong> te gall-bladder, section <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents<br />

Graph № 1<br />

Declinatio I<br />

formal signs Case endings examples<br />

Nom. sing.<br />

- a<br />

- (f)<br />

Singularis<br />

Nom. –a<br />

Gen. –ae<br />

Dat. –ae<br />

Acc. –am<br />

Abl. –a<br />

aqua, ae f<br />

costa, ae f<br />

vertebra, ae f<br />

tabuletta, ae f<br />

Pluralis<br />

Nom. –ae<br />

Gen. –arum<br />

Dat. –is<br />

Acc. –as<br />

masculine nouns<br />

by<br />

meaning (the<br />

names <strong>of</strong><br />

pr<strong>of</strong>essions and<br />

7


Abl. –is<br />

male persons)<br />

Graph № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> Greek nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

1-st declension<br />

college, ae m –<br />

colleagul<br />

oculista, ae m –<br />

oculist<br />

poeta, ae m – poet<br />

nanta, ae m -<br />

sailor<br />

formal signs Case endings Examples<br />

Femininum<br />

Nom. sing – e<br />

Gen. sing - es<br />

Singularis<br />

f m<br />

Nom. –a -es<br />

Gen. –es -ae<br />

Dat. –ae -ae<br />

Acc. –en -en<br />

(am)<br />

Abl. –e -a<br />

systole, es f<br />

chole, es f<br />

aseites, ae m<br />

diabetes, ae m<br />

masculinum<br />

Nom. sing – es<br />

Gen. sing - ae<br />

Pluralis<br />

Nom. –ae<br />

Gen. –arum<br />

Dat. –is<br />

8


Acc. –as<br />

Abl. –is<br />

Graph № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives with the 1-st declension<br />

nouns.<br />

planta, ae f (pant)<br />

medicates, a, um (medicinal)<br />

clavicula, ae f (clavicle)<br />

dexter, tra, trum (right)<br />

college, ae m (colleague)<br />

bonus, a, um (good)<br />

oculista, ae m (oculist)<br />

peritus, a, um (experienced)<br />

Graph № 4<br />

<strong>The</strong> basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming<br />

terms<br />

Affixation<br />

Stem composition<br />

(prefixation, suffixation)<br />

(combination <strong>of</strong> two or more<br />

stems)<br />

prefix<br />

root<br />

prefix<br />

gastro-scopia<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

(gaster, gastris f, stomach<br />

root<br />

suffix<br />

root<br />

- scopia - examination)<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

ending<br />

ending<br />

suffix<br />

9


+<br />

ending<br />

ab-ductor<br />

fove-ola<br />

inter-<br />

vertebr-al-<br />

is<br />

aden (o)-<br />

-tomia<br />

-ectomia<br />

-scopia<br />

-pathia<br />

-algia<br />

cholecyst<br />

-<br />

cystgloss-<br />

-algia<br />

blephar-<br />

phlep-<br />

aden-<br />

Graph № 5<br />

Prepositions<br />

govern Accusativus prepositions govern Ablativus<br />

10


per venam (Acc.)<br />

collega (Abl.)<br />

govern Accusativus<br />

in and sub<br />

cum<br />

govern Ablativus<br />

the question where<br />

to?<br />

the question<br />

where?<br />

inaquam (into water)<br />

sub costam (under<br />

rib)<br />

in aqua (in water)<br />

sub costa (under<br />

rib)<br />

Graph № 6<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin–Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the<br />

first declension nouns<br />

Latin word Greek Meaning<br />

11


aqua<br />

cellula<br />

femĭna<br />

forma<br />

glandǔla<br />

lacrĭma<br />

lingua<br />

mamma<br />

medulla<br />

natura<br />

palpebra<br />

planta<br />

tela<br />

urina<br />

vena<br />

vesica fellea<br />

vesica urinaria<br />

vita<br />

hydrcytgynaecmorphadendacryglossmam-,<br />

mastmyelphysiblepharphythisturphlebcholecystcystbi-<br />

water<br />

cell<br />

woman<br />

form<br />

gland<br />

tear<br />

tongue<br />

lactic gland<br />

spinal cord;<br />

marrow<br />

nature<br />

eyelid<br />

plant<br />

tissue<br />

urine<br />

vein<br />

gall-bladder<br />

bladder<br />

life<br />

gingiva<br />

mandibula<br />

maxilla<br />

pulpa<br />

salīva<br />

ulmyl-,<br />

genygnathparenchymatsial-,<br />

ptyal-<br />

gum<br />

mandible<br />

maxilla<br />

pulp<br />

saliva<br />

<strong>The</strong> word terminations <strong>of</strong> the first declension<br />

12


Terms-elements<br />

Meaning<br />

-aemia<br />

-algia<br />

-odynia<br />

-ectasia<br />

-ectomia<br />

-ectopia<br />

-ergia<br />

-graphia<br />

-logia<br />

-malacia<br />

-pathia<br />

-plegia<br />

-rrhagia<br />

-rrhaphia<br />

-rrhoea<br />

-scopia<br />

-therapia<br />

-tomia<br />

-uria<br />

-cele<br />

blood<br />

pain (without any organic cause)<br />

pain<br />

dilation, strain<br />

extraction<br />

displacement<br />

reactivity <strong>of</strong> an organism<br />

investigation with the help <strong>of</strong> X-ray photograph or<br />

registration <strong>of</strong> signals<br />

science, knowledge<br />

s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />

disease<br />

paralysis, stroke<br />

bleeding<br />

putting stitches<br />

leaking<br />

examination with the help <strong>of</strong> special instruments<br />

treatment<br />

cutting<br />

urine<br />

hernia; concentration <strong>of</strong> liquid<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

13


a) sinister, tra, trum - scapula, ae f (scalula)<br />

(left)<br />

clavicula, ae f (clavicle)<br />

ventriculus, i m (ventricle)<br />

oculus, i m (eye)<br />

ren, renis m (kidney)<br />

pes, pedis m (foot)<br />

manus, us f (hand)<br />

atrium, i n (atrium)<br />

b) sanus, a, um - organismus, i m (organism)<br />

(healthy)<br />

tela, ae f (tissue)<br />

cellula, ae f (cell)<br />

cor, cordis n (heart)<br />

homo. inis m (man)<br />

organon, i n (organ)<br />

Task № 2<br />

Translate the terms:<br />

a) transverse line, oblong medulla, compact substance, spongious substance, true<br />

rib, false rib;<br />

b) fracture <strong>of</strong> scapula, clavicle, vertebras; plica <strong>of</strong> mucous membrane; incisure <strong>of</strong><br />

fibula; crest <strong>of</strong> the neck <strong>of</strong> rib; sutures <strong>of</strong> calvaria.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) lacrima, ae f; 2) trauma, atis n; 3) haema, atin n; 4) struma, ae f; 5) systema, atis<br />

n; 6) forma, ae f; 7) pluma, ae f; 8) derma, atis n; 9) rima, ae f; 10) stoma, atis n;<br />

11) adenoma, atis n; 12) mamma, ae f.<br />

a) I; b) III.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />

14


1) costae verae; 2) corpus vertebrae; 3) orbita oculi; 4) collum scapulae; 5) fovea<br />

dentis; 6) vertebra coccygea; 7) concha nasalis media; 8) ala major; 9) incisura<br />

vertebralis; 10) incisura costalis.<br />

a) middle nasal coneha; b) costal incisure; c) true ribs; d) fovea <strong>of</strong> the tooth; e)<br />

nech <strong>of</strong> the scapula; f) vertebral incisure; g) orbit <strong>of</strong> the eye; h) body <strong>of</strong> the<br />

vertebra; i) cocoygeal vertebra; j) large wing.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals<br />

<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />

<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />

2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko.<br />

15


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong><br />

the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />

building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension nouns, masculine and<br />

neuter genders. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary: the stable<br />

combinations, suffixes. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin<br />

equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 2-ns declension nouns.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension nouns take the important place in medical terminology. <strong>The</strong><br />

key anatomic and histologic terms, the widely used names <strong>of</strong> diseases etc. belong<br />

to the 2-nd declension.<br />

Substantivization is the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, as the names <strong>of</strong> intestines<br />

and membranes are formed by this way. <strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns<br />

belong to the productive ones, mastering <strong>of</strong> them helps to broaden the potential<br />

vocabulary.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know:<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

the formal signs <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns;<br />

the most important exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender;<br />

the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension;<br />

the productive suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension.<br />

2. To know how:<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

to decline the masculine and neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in singular<br />

and plural;<br />

to agree adjectives with the 2-nd declension nouns;<br />

to form the 2-nd declension nouns by the way <strong>of</strong> suffixation.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

3


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What nouns belong to the 2-nd declension?<br />

2. Name the nouns which are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine<br />

gender.<br />

3. What are the case endings <strong>of</strong> masculine and neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd<br />

declension?<br />

4. Name the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension nouns and their meaning. Give<br />

examples.<br />

5. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 2-nd declension nouns and word<br />

terminations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Decline the following nouns in singular and plural:<br />

oculus, i m – eye; cavum, i n – cavity; methodus, i f – method.<br />

4


2. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />

form <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives:<br />

1) Manubrium sterni. 2) Oculus dexter et sinister. 3) Cavum cranii. 4)<br />

Septum nasi osseum. 5) Nervus cardiacus. 6) Palatum durum. 7) Crystallus<br />

alba. 8) Tuberculum pharyngeum. 9) Ligamentum latum. 10) Nervus<br />

petrosus pr<strong>of</strong>undus. 11) Musculus longus colli. 12) Porus acusticus externus.<br />

13) Periodus critica morbi chronici. 14) Sulcus nervi petrosi majoris.<br />

3. Form the terms with the known meaning:<br />

a) encephal- (brain):<br />

stone in the brain, bleeding from the brain, brain hernia, s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong><br />

the brain, headache;<br />

b) neur- (nerve):<br />

cutting <strong>of</strong> the nerve, putting stitches on the nerve, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nerve, germ <strong>of</strong> the nerve cell;<br />

c) ophthalm- (eye):<br />

pain in the eye, disease <strong>of</strong> the eyes, paralysis <strong>of</strong> the eye muscles,<br />

leaking from the eye;<br />

d) enter- (intestine):<br />

science <strong>of</strong> the intestines, fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine, transplantation <strong>of</strong><br />

intestines, spasm <strong>of</strong> the intestine, artificial opening in the intestine;<br />

e) my- (muscle):<br />

knowledge <strong>of</strong> muscles, muscle pain, muscle spasm, disease <strong>of</strong><br />

muscles, cutting <strong>of</strong> the muscle;<br />

f) gastr- (stomach):<br />

extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach, stomach bleeding, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />

stomach and duodenum, stomach leaking.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension follows the rule already given for the first declension:<br />

base + endings. However, the endings differ from those <strong>of</strong> the first declension,<br />

5


except in the dative and the ablative plural. <strong>The</strong> nouns <strong>of</strong> this declension are<br />

regularly either masculine or neuter. Most second declension masculine nouns<br />

have a nominative singular ending in -us, while a few end in -er. <strong>The</strong> neuters end<br />

in -um and those derived from Greek end in -on. E. g.:<br />

musculus, i m – muscle<br />

cancer, cri m – cancer<br />

cavum, i n – cavity<br />

organon, i n – organ<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are several nouns with the masculine endings, belonging to the<br />

feminine or neuter genders (as the exceptions):<br />

bolus, i f – clay<br />

crystallus, i f – crystal<br />

diameter, tri f – diameter<br />

methodus, i f – method<br />

periodus, i f – period<br />

virus, i n – virus; pathogenic organism<br />

<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> masculine and neuter nouns<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

Singularis<br />

m<br />

n<br />

-us, -er -um, -on<br />

-i<br />

-o<br />

-um like in Nom.<br />

-o<br />

Pluralis<br />

m n<br />

-i -a<br />

-orum<br />

-is<br />

-os -a<br />

-is<br />

6


N. B. It should be helpful to note that some second declension endings are<br />

identical to those in the first (the Dat. and Abl. plur. in -is) and others are similar<br />

(e. g., -am/-um in the Acc. sing., -arum/-orum Gen. plur., and -as/-os Acc. plur.).<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter endings are the same as the masculine<br />

andings, except that the nominative and accusative are identical to one another<br />

(this is true <strong>of</strong> all neuters <strong>of</strong> all declensions): -um/-on in the singular, -a in the<br />

plural.<br />

<strong>The</strong> examples <strong>of</strong> declining<br />

Masculine gender<br />

Ventriculus, i m – stomach, ventricle<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

Sing.<br />

ventriculus<br />

ventriculi<br />

ventriculo<br />

ventriculum<br />

ventriculo<br />

Plur.<br />

ventriculi<br />

ventriculorum<br />

ventriculis<br />

ventriculos<br />

ventriculis<br />

paediater, tri m – p(a)ediatrician; puer, i m – boy, child<br />

Sing.<br />

Plur.<br />

Nom.<br />

paediater<br />

puer<br />

paediatri<br />

pueri<br />

Gen.<br />

paediatri<br />

pueri<br />

paediatrorum<br />

puerorum<br />

Dat.<br />

paediatro<br />

puero<br />

paediatris<br />

pueris<br />

Acc.<br />

paediatrum<br />

puerum<br />

paediatros<br />

pueros<br />

Abl.<br />

paediatro<br />

puero<br />

paediatris<br />

pueris<br />

7


Neuter gender<br />

cavum, i n – cavity; organon, i n – organ<br />

Sing.<br />

Plur.<br />

Nom.<br />

cavum<br />

organon<br />

cava<br />

organa<br />

Gen.<br />

cavi<br />

organi<br />

cavorum<br />

organorum<br />

Dat.<br />

cavo<br />

organo<br />

cavis<br />

organis<br />

Acc.<br />

cavum<br />

organon<br />

cava<br />

organa<br />

Abl.<br />

cavo<br />

organo<br />

cavis<br />

organis<br />

World-formation<br />

<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the second declension nouns<br />

<strong>The</strong> following suffixes are used in medical terminology more <strong>of</strong>ten:<br />

1) -ment-um points to the action or its result; e. g.: ligamentum, i n –<br />

ligament (from ligare – to tie)<br />

2) -ism-us means poisoning, unhealthy <strong>state</strong>, deviation from standard, e. g.:<br />

botulismus, i m – botulism, hard food poisoning; rheumatismus, i m –<br />

rheumatism<br />

3) -ŭl-us, -ŭl-um, -cŭl-us, -ŏl-us have diminutive or affectionate meaning,<br />

e. g.:<br />

tuberculum, i n – tubercle;<br />

musculus, i m – muscle<br />

4) -īn-um, -ōl-um point to the name <strong>of</strong> medicine, e. g.:<br />

penicillinum, i n;<br />

validolum, i n.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the masculine<br />

nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension<br />

8


Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

animus, i m<br />

calculus, i m<br />

cancer, cri m<br />

digitus, i m<br />

fungus, i m<br />

humerus, i m<br />

locus, i m<br />

morbus, i m<br />

musculus, i m<br />

nasus, i m<br />

nervus, i m<br />

oculus, i m<br />

uterus, i m<br />

ventriculus, i m<br />

psychlithcarcindactylmyc-,<br />

mykbrachitopnos-,<br />

pathmyrhinneurophthalmmetr-,<br />

hystergastr-<br />

soul<br />

stone<br />

cancer<br />

finger<br />

mushroom, fungus<br />

shoulder<br />

place<br />

disease<br />

muscle<br />

nose<br />

nerve<br />

eye<br />

uterus<br />

stomach<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the neuter<br />

nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension<br />

Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

caecum, i n<br />

cerebrum, i n<br />

crassum, i n<br />

intestinum, i n<br />

labium, i n<br />

ligamentum, i n<br />

medicamentum, i n<br />

typhlencephalcolentercheildesmpharmac-<br />

blind gut<br />

brain<br />

large intestine<br />

intestine<br />

lip<br />

ligament<br />

medicine<br />

9


ectum, i n<br />

venenum, i n<br />

proct-<br />

toxic-, tox-<br />

rectum<br />

poison<br />

<strong>The</strong> word terminations<br />

- malacia<br />

- metria<br />

- opsia<br />

- paedia<br />

- penia<br />

- pexia<br />

- phagia<br />

- philia<br />

- phobia<br />

- plastica<br />

- stomia<br />

- trophia<br />

- iater<br />

- blastus<br />

- lithus<br />

- logus<br />

- spasmus<br />

s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />

measurement<br />

(eye) sight<br />

correction <strong>of</strong> defects<br />

lack, shortage<br />

fastening, fixation<br />

swallowing, eating<br />

inclination, predisposition<br />

fear<br />

restoration, transplantation<br />

artificial opening<br />

nutrition<br />

doctor<br />

germ<br />

stone<br />

specialist<br />

spasm<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

<strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1<br />

10


Find the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 2nd declension nouns and explain their meaning:<br />

Alveŏlus, rheumatismus, saccŭlus, Morphinum, somnambulismus,<br />

instrumentum, Menthōlum, ventriculus, capitulum, Ephedrinum.<br />

Task № 2<br />

Translate into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the nouns<br />

and adjectives:<br />

1) <strong>The</strong> right atrium, the left atrium. 2) <strong>The</strong> muscles and nerves <strong>of</strong> the eyes and<br />

nose. 3) <strong>The</strong> cavity <strong>of</strong> the nose. 4) <strong>The</strong> cervix <strong>of</strong> the mandible. 5) <strong>The</strong> symptoms <strong>of</strong><br />

a dangerous disease. 6) <strong>The</strong> good method. 7) <strong>The</strong> white clay. 8) <strong>The</strong> mortal virus.<br />

9) A good friend. 10) <strong>The</strong> cancer <strong>of</strong> the stomach, lip, oesophagus.<br />

Task № 3<br />

Translate the terms into Latin, explain their structure:<br />

1). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the muscle. 2). <strong>The</strong> innate absence <strong>of</strong> the lips. 3). Pain in<br />

fingers. 4) Specialist on tissues. 5) Local pain. 6). Treatment with<br />

medicines. 7). Putting stitches on the blind gut. 8). Mental disease. 9).<br />

Intestinal stone. 10). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the large intestine. 11). Fixation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

rectum. 12). Fear to fall ill. 13). Knowledge <strong>of</strong> ligaments. 14) Science <strong>of</strong><br />

stomach and intestinal diseases. 15). Extraction <strong>of</strong> the uterus. 16)<br />

Specialist on the eye diseases. 17). S<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong> the eyeball. 18). Nose<br />

bleeding. 19). Nerve pain. 20). Fixation <strong>of</strong> the ligament. 21). Science <strong>of</strong><br />

mushrooms.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Find the mistakes in the agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

11


1) diameter transverses; 2) brachium dexter; 3) periodus criticus; 4) nervus<br />

carotica; 5) methodus bonus; 6) labium superior.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />

1) antebrachium sinistrum a) yellow ligaments<br />

2) sulcus costae b) branch <strong>of</strong> the middle lobe<br />

3) ligamenta flava c) angle <strong>of</strong> the ventricle<br />

4) suturae cranii d) osseous septum <strong>of</strong> the nose<br />

5) ramus lobi medii e) left forearm<br />

6) septum nasi osseum f) fingers <strong>of</strong> the extremities<br />

7) angulus ventriculi g) sulcus <strong>of</strong> the rib<br />

8) digiti membrorum h) sutures <strong>of</strong> the skull<br />

Test № 3<br />

Find the mistakes in the spelling <strong>of</strong> the terms, if there are any:<br />

1) ophtalmoscopia, 2) hystologia, 3) encephalomalacia, 4) toxemia, 5) dysphagia,<br />

6) pharmacoterapia, 7) neuralgia, 8) rinorhagia, 9) citopenia, 10) histeropexia.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals<br />

<strong>of</strong> medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong><br />

<strong>establishment</strong>s with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha,<br />

2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L. Grishchenko.<br />

12


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives <strong>of</strong><br />

the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />

building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> past participles. <strong>The</strong><br />

vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> suffixes. <strong>The</strong> stable<br />

combinations. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> medical terms are attribute constructions, i. e. the<br />

word-combinations consisting <strong>of</strong> a noun and one or several adjectives.<br />

Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

adjectives in the vocabulary, finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the principles <strong>of</strong><br />

agreement with nouns, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> translation and use <strong>of</strong> some adjectives in<br />

medical terminology is directed to the forming <strong>of</strong> making up, translation and use<br />

habits <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To master the gender endings <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives.<br />

2. To learn to write down the 1-st group adjectives in the vocabulary form.<br />

3. To learn to write down the past participles in the vocabulary form.<br />

4. To know how to translate terminological word-combinations from Latin into<br />

English and on the contrary.<br />

5. To master the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives and word<br />

terminations.<br />

6. To know how to form the clinical terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the Greek-Latin<br />

equivalents <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives and word terminations.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />

adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />

the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem,<br />

the formation <strong>of</strong> the past participles.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

2. Stem<br />

3. Past participle<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />

inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />

Formed by adding the endings –us, -a, -um to the<br />

supine stem.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How many groups <strong>of</strong> adjectives are there in Latin?<br />

2. What adjectives belong to the 1-st group?<br />

3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives determined?<br />

4. How are the 1-st group adjectives declined?<br />

5. How are the past participles formed?<br />

6. Name the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives and their meaning. Give<br />

examples.<br />

7. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 1-st group adjectives and word<br />

terminations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />

form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1) linea alba<br />

2) porus acusticus<br />

3) nervus opticus<br />

4


4) palatum osseum<br />

5) fossa incisiva<br />

6) sulci palatini<br />

7) anulus fibrosus<br />

8) musculi obliqui<br />

9) bursa subcutanea<br />

10) ligamentum flavum<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form<br />

<strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1) Transverse (process, ligament, diameter, sulcus, line).<br />

2) <strong>The</strong> closed fracture, the open fracture, the complete fracture.<br />

3) <strong>The</strong> compound joint.<br />

4) <strong>The</strong> circumpflex artery.<br />

5) <strong>The</strong> nameless line.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Adjectives <strong>of</strong> the first group<br />

Depending on the gender <strong>of</strong> a noun it may belong to the first or the second<br />

declension.<br />

<strong>The</strong> masculine adjectives which end in -us, -er and the neuter ones which end<br />

in -um are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension. <strong>The</strong> feminine<br />

adjectives ending in -a are declined like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension. While the<br />

base remains constant, the adjective has masculine, feminine, or neuter endings<br />

according to the gender <strong>of</strong> the noun with which it is used, and it likewise agrees<br />

with its noun in number and case. <strong>The</strong> full declension <strong>of</strong> magnus and dexter below<br />

provides a good review <strong>of</strong> the first two declensions.<br />

Nom.<br />

Sing.<br />

magnus, magna, magnum<br />

Plur.<br />

magni, magnae, magna<br />

5


Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

magni, magnae, magni<br />

magno, magnae, magno<br />

magnum, magnam, magnum<br />

magno, magna, magno<br />

magnorum, magnarum, magnorum<br />

magnis, magnis, magnis<br />

magnos, magnas, magna<br />

magnis, magnis, magnis<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

Sing.<br />

dexter, dextra, dextrum<br />

dextri, dextrae, dextri<br />

dextro, dextrae, dextro<br />

dextrum, dextram, dextrum<br />

dextro, dextra, dextro<br />

Plur.<br />

dextri, dextrae, dextra<br />

dextrorum, dextrarum, dextrorum<br />

dextris, dextris, dextris<br />

dextros, dextras, dextra<br />

dextris, dextris, dextris<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form: magnus, a, um; dexter, tra, trum.<br />

Past Participles<br />

Past participles have the same endings that the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group<br />

have: -us (m), -a (f), -um (n). E. g.:<br />

compositus, a, um – compound, complex<br />

laceratus, a, um – lacerated<br />

mixtus, a, um – mixed<br />

Past participles are declined like the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group: the<br />

masculine and neuter genders like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the second declension, the feminine<br />

gender like the nouns <strong>of</strong> the first declension. Like an adjective, a past participle<br />

agrees with its noun in gender, number and case.<br />

articulatio, onis f<br />

compositus, a, um<br />

6


joint<br />

compound<br />

processus, us m<br />

process<br />

transversus, a, um<br />

transverse<br />

Substantivization<br />

In Latin there is a group <strong>of</strong> substantivized adjectives, i. e. those playing the<br />

part <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />

E. g.:<br />

1) rectus, a, um – straight (adjective) – rectum, i n – rectum (noun);<br />

2) caecus, a, um – blind (adj.) – caecum, i n – blind gut, caecum (noun);<br />

3) aegrotus, a, um – ill, sick (adj.) – aegrotus, i m – patient (noun).<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />

<strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives<br />

Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

albus, a, um<br />

angustus, a, um<br />

caecus, a, um<br />

crassus, a, um<br />

durus, a, um<br />

flavus, a, um<br />

griseus, a, um<br />

humidus, a, um<br />

magnus, a, um<br />

leuk-, leucstentyphlpachysclerxanthpolihygrmega-,<br />

megal-, macr-<br />

white<br />

narrow<br />

blind<br />

thick<br />

hard; solid<br />

yellow<br />

grey<br />

humid, damp<br />

large, big<br />

7


medius, a, um<br />

mortuus, a, um<br />

multus, a, um<br />

niger, gra, grum<br />

novus, a, um<br />

parvus, a, um<br />

ruber, bra, brum<br />

siccus, a, um<br />

tardus, a, um<br />

mesnecrpolymelanneoolig-,<br />

micrerythrxerbrady-<br />

middle<br />

dead<br />

numerous; much<br />

black<br />

new<br />

small<br />

red<br />

dry<br />

slow<br />

<strong>The</strong> word terminations<br />

- dermia<br />

- aesthesia<br />

- megalia<br />

- sthenia<br />

- kinesia<br />

skin<br />

feeling, sense<br />

increase<br />

strength, force<br />

movement, motion<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1<br />

Translate the terms into Latin, write and memorize the vocabulary form:<br />

spongy substance<br />

optic nerves<br />

acoustic passage<br />

infectious disease<br />

palatine sulcus<br />

8


fibrous rings<br />

mucous membrane<br />

lymphatic nodes<br />

Task № 2<br />

Agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns,<br />

translate the terms:<br />

1) dexter, tra, trum (clavicle, eye, scapula);<br />

2) caroticus, a, um (tubercle, nerve, ligament);<br />

3) sinister, tra, trum (eye, scapula, clavicle);<br />

4) transversus, a, um (diameter, hole, sulcus);<br />

5) internus, a, um (disease, nerve, artery).<br />

Task №3<br />

Form the terms with the known meanings:<br />

a) leuk- (white):<br />

white blood cell, lack <strong>of</strong> leucocytes, treatment with leucocytes, white<br />

blood, bleeding in the patients with leucosis;<br />

b) mega-, megal- (large):<br />

large eyes, large tongue, mania <strong>of</strong> greatness, increase <strong>of</strong> the large part <strong>of</strong><br />

the brain;<br />

c) erythr- (red):<br />

red blood cell, red colouring <strong>of</strong> the urine, vision <strong>of</strong> objects in red<br />

colouring, germ <strong>of</strong> the red blood cell, swallowing <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

9


1) sinistrum; 2) lata; 3) zygomaticus; 4) superior; 5) niger; 6) coccygea; 7)<br />

criticum; 8) dexter; 9) maius; 10) spinosum; 11) pharyngea; 12) asper.<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />

1) periodus … a) latus, a, um<br />

2) tuberculum … b) dexter, tra, trum<br />

3) glandula … c) pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um<br />

4) ligamentum … d) criticus, a, um<br />

5) costa … e) mucosus, a, um<br />

6) oculus … f) longus, a, um<br />

7) nervus … g) verus, a, um<br />

8) vena … h) pharyngeus, a, um<br />

Test № 3<br />

Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin clinical terms:<br />

1). Erythrodermia a) Dry skin<br />

2). Xerodermia b) Dryness in the nose<br />

3). Xerocheilia c) Vision <strong>of</strong> objects in yellow<br />

colouring<br />

4). Erythropenia d) Imaginary decrease <strong>of</strong> the<br />

visible objects<br />

5). Melanodermia e) Thick tongue<br />

6). Bradykinesia f) Lack <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes<br />

7). Proctorrhagia g) Increase <strong>of</strong> the urine quantity<br />

8). Xanthodermia h) Red colouring <strong>of</strong> the skin<br />

9). Pachyglossia i) Dryness <strong>of</strong> the eye<br />

10


10). Xerorhinia j) Slow movement<br />

11). Xanthopsia k) Dry lips<br />

12). Megalopsia l) Black skin<br />

13). Polyuria m) Yellow skin<br />

14). Xerophthalmia n) Bleeding from the rectum<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 1<br />

Content modules №№ 1-2<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

1. Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />

building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies <strong>The</strong> practical skills to the content modules 1-2<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />

terminology” includes the free reading <strong>of</strong> the Latin text, the use <strong>of</strong> the alphabet<br />

while working with the dictionary, the correct writing <strong>of</strong> the sounds <strong>of</strong> the Latin<br />

alphabet; the practical use <strong>of</strong> the Greek letter combinations in the words derived<br />

from Greek; free mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical material and the skill to classify the words<br />

by cases with the purpose <strong>of</strong> correct writing <strong>of</strong> endings, free constructing <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the acquired grammatical<br />

knowledge. That's why it is so important to work out the practical skills to the<br />

content modules 1-2.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the Latin alphabet, the classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants,<br />

diphthongs, letter combinations, long and short syllables, the rules <strong>of</strong> stress.<br />

2. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />

the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns.<br />

3. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />

gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />

4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />

5. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />

paradigm, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

6. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns,<br />

the 1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />

7. To know how to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns and<br />

adjectives, to write them in the vocabulary form.<br />

8. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns, to form two- and many-word<br />

anatomic terms.<br />

3


9. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />

contrary.<br />

10. To know how to form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, to<br />

translate them from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

English language<br />

Russian language, English language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />

and sounds, diphthongs and<br />

monophthongs.<br />

Words in English and Russian are<br />

pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />

syllable, which is called “stress”.<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong><br />

grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem, the<br />

formation <strong>of</strong> the past participles.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

4


Term<br />

Alphabet<br />

Diphthong<br />

Phoneme<br />

Phonetics<br />

Stress<br />

Penult<br />

Antepenult<br />

Term<br />

Gender<br />

Number<br />

Case<br />

Declension<br />

Stem<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

Definition<br />

<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />

order.<br />

A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />

as one sound or one syllable.<br />

<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />

continuous speech stream.<br />

<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />

linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

language.<br />

Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />

words.<br />

Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />

Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />

name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />

science, production or arts.<br />

Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />

genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />

When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />

when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />

plural.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants, diphthongs, letter<br />

combinations.<br />

2. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />

3. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />

the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns.<br />

4. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />

gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />

5. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />

6. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the paradigm,<br />

the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

7. Name the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the<br />

prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />

8. Name the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the past<br />

participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />

9. Name the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />

1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Read correctly the words, underline the Greek prefixes and roots, explain<br />

their meaning: hypogastricus, myologia, polyvaccinum, salicylicus, pyrosis,<br />

otomycosis, dystonia, hypertonicus, glycerinum, oxydatus.<br />

6


2. Translate the terms from Latin into English:<br />

1) incisura clavicularis manubrii sterni<br />

2) vena obliqua artii sinistri<br />

3) nervus petrosus minor<br />

4) foramen venae cavae<br />

5) fovea costalis processus transversi<br />

6) vasa auris internae<br />

3. Translate the terms from English into Latin:<br />

1) anterior rib surface<br />

2) inferior joint process<br />

3) mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the gallbladder<br />

4) joint surface <strong>of</strong> the rib tubercle<br />

5) incisure <strong>of</strong> the heart apex<br />

6) transverse nerve <strong>of</strong> the neck<br />

4. Form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, translate them into<br />

English:<br />

I. 1) phleb(o) – (-logia, -logus, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhagia, -ectasia, -<br />

ectomia, -spasmus);<br />

2) dactyl(o) – (-odynia, -scopia, -algia, -graphia);<br />

3) my(o) – (-cele, -plegia, -rrhaphia, -blastus, -algia).<br />

II. 1) -pathia (my-, encephal-, neur-, ophthalm-, aden-);<br />

2) -logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, hist-, aeti-);<br />

3) -algia (ophthalm-, mast-, cyst-, cholecyst-, neur-, my-).<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> theses <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents<br />

1. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and<br />

consonants, diphthongs, letter combinations.<br />

2. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />

7


3. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

nouns in the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> nouns.<br />

4. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into<br />

groups, gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem.<br />

5. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />

6. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension nouns, the<br />

paradigm, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

7. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />

using the prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />

8. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st group adjectives, the past<br />

participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />

9. Recurrence <strong>of</strong> the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declension<br />

nouns, the 1-st group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

aegrotus, a, um – homo, inis m<br />

tela, ae f<br />

cella, ae f<br />

cor, cordis n<br />

organismus, i m<br />

hepar, atis n<br />

ventriculus, i m<br />

8


organon, i n<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

a) vertebra (thoracic, coccygeal, sacral, superficial, cervical);<br />

b) tubercle (anterior, posterior, carotic, pharyngeous, articular);<br />

c) fracture <strong>of</strong> the scapula, clavicle, vertebrae, ribs; good method; deep petrous<br />

nerve; transverse diameter; right (left) eye; the skull cavity; mandible <strong>of</strong> the<br />

breastbone.<br />

Task № 3.<br />

Translate the word-combinations with prepositions into Latin:<br />

1) in the external plate<br />

2) through the veins<br />

3) with the colleague<br />

4) between the vertebrae<br />

5) under the right scapula<br />

6) in capsules, in tablets, in ampoules<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine how the italicized letters (letter combinations) are pronounced:<br />

1) aёr 6) Iodum<br />

2) aeger 7) exitus<br />

3) iugularis 8) Aloё<br />

4) lagoena 9) Xer<strong>of</strong>ormium<br />

5) oxydum 10) paediater<br />

<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

9


a) ae; b) oe; c) e; d) i; e) j; f) ks; g) kz.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Determine the stressed syllables:<br />

vertebra; maxilla; glutaeus; limpidus; tunica; cavernosus; incisura; dilutus;<br />

ventriculus; stomachus; apertura, capitulum; pelvinus; cerebrum; acidum.<br />

a) penult; b) antepenult.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Find the mistakes in the agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) diameter transverses; 2) brachium dexter; 3) periodus criticus; 4) nervus carotica;<br />

5) methodus bonus; 6) labium superior.<br />

Test № 4.<br />

Add the corresponding ending instead <strong>of</strong> the dots:<br />

1) apertura sin … sphenoidalis<br />

2) basis ossis sacr …<br />

3) lamina et foramin … cribrosa<br />

4) oss … membri superioris<br />

5) facies articularis tuberculi cost …<br />

6) facies posterior part … petrosae<br />

7) pediculus arc … vertebrae<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) –us; b) –i; c) –is; d) –a; e) –ae.<br />

Test № 5.<br />

Find the mistakes in the spelling <strong>of</strong> the terms, if there are any:<br />

10


1) ophtalmoscopia, 2) hystologia, 3) encephalomalacia, 4) toxemia, 5)<br />

dysphagia, 6) pharmacoterapia, 7) neuralgia, 8) rinorhagia, 9) citopenia, 10)<br />

histeropexia.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />

nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> third declension nouns. <strong>The</strong> determination <strong>of</strong><br />

stem, types, paradigm <strong>of</strong> all genders.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

In the system <strong>of</strong> Latin declensions the third declension is the most widespread<br />

and at the same time difficult for mastering. If in the nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-sr, 2-nd, 4-th<br />

and 5-th declensions the gender is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing., while<br />

determining the gender <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns it is necessary to know not<br />

only the ending <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing., but also to take into consideration the typical<br />

endings <strong>of</strong> the stem in Gen sing., since just these endings are indicators <strong>of</strong> the noun<br />

gender (salus, salutis f, but ulcus, ulceris n; pes, pedis m, but tabes, tabis f etc.).<br />

While mastering this topic a special attention should be paid to the noun<br />

stem, as the most 3-rd declension nouns have a short stem in Nom. sing., but it<br />

shows itself in full only in Gen. sing.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

To know :<br />

−<br />

−<br />

the formal signs <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns;<br />

the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing the 3-rd declension nouns in the vocabulary<br />

(including monosyllabic nouns);<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> nouns;<br />

the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the consonant type;<br />

the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type;<br />

the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the vowel type;<br />

the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the case endings <strong>of</strong> the vowel type;<br />

the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the mixed type;<br />

the peculiarity <strong>of</strong> the declining <strong>of</strong> the mixed type nouns;<br />

the group <strong>of</strong> nouns which are declined by the consonant type while having<br />

the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the mixed type.<br />

To know how:<br />

- to distinguish parisyllabic and imparisyllabic nouns;<br />

- to determine the practical stem and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />

nouns;<br />

- to decline the nouns belonging to the consonant, vowel and mixed types.<br />

3


To master: the lexical minimum <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns (30 units).<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Case.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

2. Declension.<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

3. Stem.<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

4. Parisyllabic nouns. removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

5. Imparisyllabic nouns. Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

4


4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the third declension nouns.<br />

2. What is the peculiarity <strong>of</strong> writing the third declension nouns in the<br />

vocabulary?<br />

3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> nouns found?<br />

4. What nouns belong to the parisyllabic ones?<br />

5. What nouns belong to the imparisyllabic ones?<br />

6. What are the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the consonant type nouns?<br />

7. Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type.<br />

8. What are the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the vowel type nouns?<br />

9. What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the vowel type nouns?<br />

10. What nouns belong to the mixed type?<br />

11. What is the difference <strong>of</strong> the mixed type from the consonant one?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Determine, which <strong>of</strong> the given nouns belong to the imparisyllabic ones and which<br />

– to parisyllabic ones:<br />

1) axis, is m; 2) os, ossis n; 3) apis, is f; 4) apex, icis m; 5) os, oris n; 6) rete, is n; 7)<br />

cutis, is f; 8) cor, cordis n; 9) pes, pedis m; 10) naris, is f.<br />

2. Determine the type <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the nouns, given in the previous task.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> masculine, feminine and neuter nouns having different endings in Nom.<br />

sing. and the typical ending –is in Gen. sing. belong to the third declension. <strong>The</strong><br />

third declension nouns are subdivided into parisyllabic and imparisyllabic ones. <strong>The</strong><br />

parisyllabic nouns have the same number <strong>of</strong> syllables in Nom. sing. and Gen. sing.,<br />

the imparisyllabic ones have one syllable more in Gen. sing. than in Nom. sing.<br />

While studying the third declension nouns it is necessary to pay a special<br />

attention to the finding <strong>of</strong> stem, as it is short in Nom. sing. and shows itself in full<br />

5


only in Gen. sing. Besides it should be remembered that one-syllable nouns are<br />

written in full in Nom. sing. and Gen. sing., e. g.: cor, cordis n (heart); dens, dentis<br />

m (tooth); pars, parties f (part); os, ossis n (bone); os, oris n (mouth).<br />

Depending on the stem ending, the third declension nouns are subdivided into<br />

three types: consonant, vowel and mixed ones.<br />

<strong>The</strong> consonant type.<br />

<strong>The</strong> imparisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> all genders, whose stem ends in one consonant,<br />

belong to the consonant type. This type is the basic and most widely spread one. E.<br />

g.: flos, floris m; radix, īcis f; os, oris n.<br />

Table № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant type<br />

Casus Singularis Pluralis<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

different<br />

-is<br />

-i<br />

-em (m, f), as Nom. (n)<br />

-e<br />

-es (m, f), -a (n)<br />

-um<br />

-ĭbus<br />

-es (m, f), -a (n)<br />

-ĭbus<br />

<strong>The</strong> vowel type.<br />

<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns having the endings -e, -al, -ar in Nom. sing. belong to the<br />

vowel type. E. g.: rete, is n (net), animal, ālis n (animal), cochlear, āris n (spoon).<br />

<strong>The</strong> attention should be paid to the noun hepar, ătis n (liver) which is declined<br />

according to the consonant type.<br />

6


<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the vowel type have the following differences from the<br />

consonant type:<br />

1) Abb. sing. -i (instead <strong>of</strong> -e);<br />

2) Nom. plur. and Acc. plur. -ia (instead <strong>of</strong> -a);<br />

3) Gen. plur -ium (instead <strong>of</strong> -um).<br />

Though the vowel type is not widely spread in the Latin medical terminology,<br />

it is necessary to memorize its peculiarities, because the second group adjectives are<br />

declined according to this type.<br />

<strong>The</strong> mixed type.<br />

Two groups <strong>of</strong> nouns belong to the mixed type:<br />

a) the parisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> masculine and feminine genders having the<br />

endings -es or -is in Nom. sing. E. g.: auris, is f (ear); canalis, is m<br />

(channel); fames, is f (hunger);<br />

b) the imparisyllabic nouns <strong>of</strong> all genders, whose stem ends in two<br />

consonant, e. g.: dens, dentis m (tooth) => stem dent-; pars, parties<br />

f (part) => stem part-: os, ossis n (bone) => stem oss-; here belong<br />

also formally parisyllabic nouns, whose stem ends in three<br />

consonants. E. g.: venter, tris m (belly) => stem ventr-.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns <strong>of</strong> the mixed type have the ending -ium (instead <strong>of</strong> -um) in Gen.<br />

plur. <strong>The</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> case endings don’t differ from the case endings <strong>of</strong> the consonant<br />

type.<br />

It is necessary to remember that some nouns, which have formal signs <strong>of</strong> the<br />

mixed type, are declined by the consonant type, e. g.: mater, tris f (mother; meninx);<br />

pater, tris m (father); canis, is m, f (dog).<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

7


A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Fill in the table:<br />

Abl.<br />

Abl.<br />

Nom.<br />

Nom.<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Gen.<br />

sing.<br />

sing.<br />

plur.<br />

plur.<br />

plur.<br />

plur.<br />

plur.<br />

-e<br />

-i<br />

-es<br />

-a<br />

-ia<br />

-um<br />

-um<br />

1. ren, renis m<br />

2. rete, is n<br />

3. pes, pedis m<br />

4. aurus, is f<br />

5. secale, is, n<br />

6. flos, floris m<br />

7. mater, tris f<br />

8. corpus, oris n<br />

9. pars, parties f<br />

10. canalis, is m<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> third declension nouns are subdivided into:<br />

a) three types <strong>of</strong> declining;<br />

b) two types <strong>of</strong> declining;<br />

c) four types <strong>of</strong> declining.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

<strong>The</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> nouns is found by dropping:<br />

a) <strong>of</strong> the ending Nom. sing.;<br />

b) <strong>of</strong> the ending Gen. sing.;<br />

c) <strong>of</strong> the ending Abl. sing.<br />

8


Test № 3.<br />

Fill in the table.<br />

Case ending<br />

Type<br />

consonant vowel mixed<br />

Abl. sing. -e<br />

Abl. sing. -i<br />

Nom., Acc. plur. -a<br />

Nom., Acc. plur. -ia<br />

Gen. plur. -um<br />

Gen. plur. -ium<br />

9


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />

<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />

declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />

degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the first group adjectives<br />

with the 3 rd declension nouns.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Adjectives are as important as nouns in terms. Most <strong>of</strong> anatomic terms are the<br />

combinations <strong>of</strong> nouns with adjectives. <strong>The</strong> great number <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

pharmaceutical terms are the combinations <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd declension nouns with the 1 st<br />

group adjectives (cor sanum, pars magna, radix cariosa, tumor benignus etc.)<br />

Mastering <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the 3 rd<br />

declension nouns helps to students to correcty form anatomic and pharmaceutical<br />

terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives.<br />

2. To know what nouns belong to the 3 rd declension.<br />

3. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with masculine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />

the 3 rd declension.<br />

4. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

3 rd declension.<br />

5. To know how to agree the 1 st group adjectives with neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd<br />

declension.<br />

6. To master the habits <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> medical terms from Latin into<br />

English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun<br />

and an adjective, the description <strong>of</strong><br />

declensions, the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />

noun and adjective stem.<br />

3


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1) What adjectives belong to the 1 st group?<br />

2) What nouns belong to the 3 rd declension?<br />

3) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />

the 3 rd declension?<br />

4) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

3 rd declension?<br />

5) How are the 1 st group adjectives agreed with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd<br />

declension?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

4


1. Translate the terms into English:<br />

1. Axis opticus. 2. Sanguis venosus and arteriosus. 3. Pancreas<br />

accessorium. 4. Systema nervosum. 5. Ren dexter and sinister. 6.<br />

Vas lymphaticum. 7. Cutis sicca. 8. Canalis nutritius. 9. Injectio<br />

subcutanea. 10. Tumor malignus.<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1. Acute pain. 2. Coccygeal bone. 3. Right and left femur. 4.<br />

Pr<strong>of</strong>ound head. 5. Long extremity. 6. Lymphatic system. 7.<br />

Middle ear. 8. Small tuber. 9. Right foot. 10. Black pepper.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />

Graph № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

third declension.<br />

pulmo, onis m<br />

left lung<br />

sinister, tra, trum<br />

flos, oris m<br />

white flower<br />

albus, a, um<br />

dens, dentis m<br />

carious tooth<br />

cariosus, a, um<br />

Graph № 2.<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the third<br />

declension<br />

pars, parties f<br />

petrous part<br />

petrosus, a, um<br />

extremitas, atis f<br />

right extremity<br />

dexter, tra, trum<br />

injectio, onis f<br />

subcutaneous injection<br />

subcutaneus, a, um<br />

Graph № 3.<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 1 st group adjectives with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the third<br />

declension<br />

crus, uris n<br />

left crus<br />

sinister, tra, trum<br />

systema, atis n<br />

nervous system<br />

nervosus, a, um<br />

caput, itis n<br />

long head<br />

longus, a, um<br />

6


<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) foramen, inis n (round, palatine, incised, large);<br />

2) rete, is n (venous, arterial, long, cutaneous);<br />

3) os, ossis n (zygomatic, palatine, wide, long, tympanic, hyoid);<br />

4) margo, inis m (zygomatic, squamous, interosseal, lambdoid);<br />

5) pars, rtis f (petrous, right, left, spinous)<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Decline the terms in Sing. and Plur.:<br />

1) canalis opticus – optic canal;<br />

2) tuberositas deltoidea – deltoid tuberosity;<br />

Task № 3.<br />

Put the terms in Gen.sing. and Nom. plur.:<br />

1) ulcus chronicum – chronic ulcer;<br />

2) radix cariosa – carious root;<br />

3) homo sanus – healthy man;<br />

4) symptoma periculosum – dangerous symptom;<br />

5) paries internus – internal wall;<br />

6) solutio spirituosa – spirituous solution.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd declension nouns:<br />

7


1) margo, inis . . .; 2) os, ossis . . .; 3) apex, icis . . . ; 4) phalanx, ngis . . . ; 5)<br />

pulmo. onis . . ; 6) cor, cordis . . . ; 7) systema, atis . . . ; 8) corpus, oris . . . ;<br />

9) pes, pedis . . . ; 10) dens, dentis . . . ; 11) auris, is . . . ; 12) radix, icis . . ..<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum<br />

Test № 2<br />

Determine the group and declension <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

1) latus, a, um; 2) acer, acris, acre; 3) liber, are, erum; 4) pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um; 5)<br />

dexter, tra, trum; 6) medius, a, um; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) asper, era, erum; 9)<br />

ruber, bra, brum; 10) longus, a, um; 11) celer, eris, ere; 12) squamosus, a, um.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) 1 st group b) 2 nd group<br />

Test № 3<br />

Find the correct ending for the adjectives:<br />

1) pars petros . . .; 2) foramen rotund . . .; 3) paries extern . . .; 4) os<br />

hyoide . . .; 5) homo san . . .; 6) abdomen acut . . .; 7) canalis optic .<br />

. .; 8) tumor benign . . .; 9) tuberositas deltoide . . .; 10) margo<br />

interosse . . .; 11) cutis sicc . . .; 12) pancreas accessori . . ..<br />

a) –us b) –a c) –um<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

8


Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />

nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> consonant type. <strong>The</strong> masculine gender. <strong>The</strong><br />

exceptions. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations. <strong>The</strong><br />

vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> systematization and processing <strong>of</strong> the lexico-grammatival material helps to<br />

realize the main purpose <strong>of</strong> teaching Latin in <strong>higher</strong> medical <strong>educational</strong><br />

<strong>establishment</strong> – the practical mastering <strong>of</strong> medical terminology as a whole and its<br />

separate branches (anatomic, histologic, clinical, pharmaceutical).<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

To master:<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

the masculine endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension nouns;<br />

the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender;<br />

the suffixes <strong>of</strong> masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension;<br />

the Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension.<br />

To know how:<br />

- to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension and exceptions;<br />

- to form terms-composites <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements;<br />

- to analyze the terms-composites.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />

5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />

Nom. sing. and Gen, sing.?<br />

2. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine gender?<br />

3. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> the masculine nouns and their meaning? Give<br />

examples.<br />

4. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension masculine nouns<br />

and word terminations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

4


1. Add Gen. sing. to the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> these masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-<br />

rd declension:<br />

cortex, tumor, sapo, pollex, vomer, pes, aër, index, venter, flexor.<br />

2. Translate into English, write down and learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the<br />

words:<br />

1) Paries cardiacus. 2) Apex cordis. 3) Trochanter major et minor. 4)<br />

Musculus depressor anguli oris. 5) Cor bovinum. 6) Dolor ventris. 7) Gaster<br />

aegra. 8) Quies absoluta.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the following endings in<br />

Nom.sing.: -o (except those nouns which end in -io, -do, -go), -or, -os, -er, -es<br />

(imparisyllabic), -ex.<br />

It is necessary to memorize also the endings <strong>of</strong> genitive singular.<br />

Nom. sing.<br />

-o<br />

Endings<br />

Gen. sing.<br />

-ōnis<br />

-ĭnis<br />

Examples<br />

pulmo, pulmōnis m – lung<br />

homo, homĭnis m – man<br />

-or<br />

-oris<br />

dolor, dolōris m – pain<br />

-os<br />

-oris<br />

flos, floris m – flower<br />

-er<br />

-(t)ris<br />

-ĕris<br />

-ēris<br />

venter, ventris m – venter<br />

aether, aethĕris m – ether<br />

trochanter, trochantēris m – trochanter<br />

5


-es<br />

(imparisyllabic)<br />

-ĕtis<br />

-edis<br />

paries, pariĕtis m – paries<br />

pes, pedis m – foot<br />

-ex<br />

-gis<br />

-ĭcis<br />

rex, regis m – king, ruler<br />

apex, apĭcis m – top<br />

<strong>The</strong> exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> masculine gender<br />

Some nouns with masculine endings belong to feminine or neuter genders.<br />

<strong>The</strong>y are exceptions, memorize them.<br />

Feminine gender: gaster, gastris f – stomach<br />

mater, matris f – mother; meninx<br />

quies,quiētis f – rest; peace<br />

lex, legis f – law<br />

Neuter gender:<br />

cor, cordis n – heart<br />

os, oris n – mouth<br />

os, ossis n – bone<br />

tuber, tubĕris n – tuber<br />

<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> masculine nouns<br />

-or<br />

– points to the physical or mental <strong>state</strong>, e. g.: dolor, ōris m – pain;<br />

timor, ōris m – fear; liquor, ōris m – liquid;<br />

-sor, -tor<br />

– mean a person or a subject performing some action, e. g.: lector,<br />

ōris m – lecturer; doctor, ōris m – doctor, scientist; levator, ōris<br />

m – levator (muscle); depressor, ōris m – depressor (muscle).<br />

6


<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension masculine nouns<br />

Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

calor, ōris m<br />

color, ōris m<br />

homo, ĭnis m<br />

pes, pedis m<br />

pulmo, ōnis m<br />

sudor, ōris m<br />

tumor, ōris m<br />

thermchrom-,<br />

chromatanthroppodpneum-,<br />

pneumonhidronc-<br />

heat; warmth<br />

colour<br />

man; human being<br />

foot<br />

lung<br />

sweat, perspiration<br />

tumour<br />

Exceptions<br />

cor, cordis n<br />

mater, tris f<br />

os, oris n<br />

os, ossis n<br />

cardimeningstomatoste-,<br />

ost-<br />

heart<br />

meninx<br />

mouth<br />

bone<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Agree adjectives with nouns, translate the terms:<br />

1) tumor, ōris m – tumour (benign, malignant); 2) pes, pedis m – foot (right,<br />

left); 3) os, ossis n – bone (zygomatic, palatine, hyoid, wide); 4) paries, ĕtis m –<br />

paries (front, back, external, internal); 5) flos, floris m – flower (white, yellow, red);<br />

6) homo, ĭnis m – man (good, sick, healthy).<br />

7


Task № 2.<br />

Translate into Latin, learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1) <strong>The</strong> top <strong>of</strong> the left lung. 2) <strong>The</strong> bones <strong>of</strong> the foot. 3) <strong>The</strong> acute pain. 4) <strong>The</strong><br />

right lung, the left lung. 5) <strong>The</strong> tuber <strong>of</strong> the maxilla. 6) <strong>The</strong> tumour <strong>of</strong> the brain. 7)<br />

Through the mouth, through the rectum.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the type <strong>of</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) phalanx, ngis f; 2) pater, tris m: 3) fames, is f; 4) homo, ĭnis m; 5) hepar,<br />

ătis n; 6) exemplar, aris n; 7) ulcus, ĕris n; 8) solutio, ōnis f; 9) secale, is n; 10)<br />

dens, dentis m; 11) canalis, is m; 12) rete, is n; 13) cuspis, ĭdis f; 14) cutis, is f; 15)<br />

os, oris n.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) consonant; b) vowel; c) mixed.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Add the corresponding endings instead <strong>of</strong> dots:<br />

1. In apic… pulmon… sinistr…<br />

2. Foetor ex or…<br />

3. Pro auctor…<br />

4. Apex oss… sacr…<br />

5. Incisura cardiaca pulmon… sinistr…<br />

6. Cavum or…<br />

7. Dolor acut… in regione cord…<br />

8. Planta ped…<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

8


a) –is; b) –i; c) –e; d) –us.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 1<br />

Content module № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />

nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> vowel type, the neuter gender endings. <strong>The</strong><br />

exceptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> some<br />

neuter gender words – vas, gramma etc. <strong>The</strong><br />

vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents. <strong>The</strong><br />

stable combinations.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension are <strong>of</strong>ten met in the anatomic<br />

terminology. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

3-rd declension, on the base <strong>of</strong> which many clinical terms are formed, are not less<br />

important and widely-used.<br />

<strong>The</strong> detailed learning <strong>of</strong> the neuter endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension with the typical<br />

endings <strong>of</strong> Gen. sing., the Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes promotes the<br />

enrichment <strong>of</strong> the students' vocabulary, the consolidation <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong><br />

grammatically correct and well-considered use <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the vowel type.<br />

2. To know the typical endings <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

3. To know the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender in the vocabulary form.<br />

4. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension and word terminations.<br />

5. To know the most important suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension nouns.<br />

6. To know the stable combinations with the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension.<br />

7. To know how to determine the gender and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension neuter nouns.<br />

8. To know how to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 3-rd declension<br />

neuter nouns and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

9. To know how to translate the terms with the 3-rd declension neuter nouns and<br />

the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

10. To know how to form the clinical terms with the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />

the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension and the suffixes, to translate the terms<br />

from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3


3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />

5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

4


1. What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining the nouns <strong>of</strong> the vowel type?<br />

2. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in Nom. sing.<br />

and Gen. sing.?<br />

3. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> neuter gender?<br />

4. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> neuter nouns and their meaning? Give examples.<br />

5. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension neuter nouns and<br />

word terminations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />

form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1). Ulcus chronicum. 2) Abdomen acutum. 3) Systema nervosum. 4) Crus<br />

dextrum et sinistrum. 5) Corpus hominis. 6) Foramen caecum linguae. 7) Cavitas<br />

abdominis. 8) Ren dexter et sinister. 9) Ossa capitis. 10) Lobus hepatis. 11) Corpus<br />

linguae. 12) Ligamentum capĭtis femŏris.<br />

2. Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) corpus, oris n – body (yellow, adipose, callous); 2) f<strong>of</strong>amen, inis n –<br />

foramen (round, palatine, incisive, big, nutritional, optic); 3) systema, atis n –<br />

system (nervous, lymphatic, peripheral, digestive, respiratory); 4) rete, is n – net<br />

(long, venous, arterial, cutaneous); 5) ulcus, ěris n – ulcer (callous, chronic,<br />

cutaneous, malignant, benign).<br />

3. Translate the terms into Latin, learn the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

5


1) <strong>The</strong> ulcer <strong>of</strong> the duodenum and stomach. 2) <strong>The</strong> sick kidneys. 3) <strong>The</strong><br />

dangerous trauma. 4) <strong>The</strong> cavity <strong>of</strong> the abdomen. 5) <strong>The</strong> lacerated foramen <strong>of</strong> the<br />

breast.<br />

4. Form the nouns with the suffix –oma, explain their meaning:<br />

1) derma, derm- (skin); 2) mys, my- (muscle); 3) fibra, fibr- (fiber); 4) odus,<br />

odont- (tooth); 5) sarx, sarc- (meat).<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the endings <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing. and<br />

Gen. sing. shown in the table below.<br />

Nom. sing.<br />

-e<br />

Endings<br />

Gen. sing.<br />

-is<br />

rete, retis n – net<br />

Examples<br />

-l<br />

-lis<br />

fel, fellis n – gall<br />

-ar<br />

-āris<br />

-ătis<br />

cochlear, cochleāris n – spoon<br />

hepar, hepătis n – liver<br />

-ur<br />

-ŏris<br />

-ŭris<br />

femur, femŏris n – thigh<br />

guttur, gutturis n – throat<br />

-us<br />

-ŏris<br />

-ūris<br />

-ěris<br />

corpus, corpŏris n – body<br />

crus, cruris n – shin<br />

ulcus, ulcěris n – ulcer<br />

6


-t<br />

-ĭtis<br />

caput, capĭtis n – head<br />

-c<br />

-tis<br />

lac, lactis n – milk<br />

-ma<br />

-ătis<br />

asthma, asthmătis n – asthma<br />

-en<br />

-ĭnis<br />

abdomen, abdomĭnis n – abdomen<br />

<strong>The</strong> exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> neuter gender<br />

sol, solis m – sun<br />

lien, lienis m – (Latin) spleen<br />

splen, splenis m – (Greek) spleen<br />

ren, renis m – kidney<br />

aden, aděnis m – gland<br />

<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />

-oma – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> tumour, e. g.: adenoma, ătis n – adenoma;<br />

myoma, ătis n – muscle tumour;<br />

-ema – points to the presence <strong>of</strong> rash, abscesses etc., e. g.: erythema, ătis n –<br />

erythema; exanthema, ătis n – exanthema;<br />

-men – means the consequence <strong>of</strong> action, e. g.: nomen, ĭnis n<br />

foramen, ĭnis n – foramen.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension neuter nouns<br />

– name;<br />

7


Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

abdomen, ĭnis n<br />

caput, ĭtis n<br />

corpus, ŏris n<br />

lac, lactis n<br />

pectus, ŏris n<br />

pus, puris n<br />

viscus, ěris n<br />

laparcephal-,<br />

kephalsom-,<br />

somatgalactstethpysplanchn-<br />

Exceptions<br />

abdomen<br />

head<br />

body<br />

milk<br />

breast, chest<br />

pus<br />

internal organ;<br />

viscera<br />

lien, ēnis m<br />

ren, renis m<br />

sol, solis m<br />

splen-<br />

nephr-<br />

heli-<br />

spleen<br />

kidney<br />

sun<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns and translate the terms into English:<br />

1) animal, alis n (domesticus, a, um)<br />

2) femur, oris n (sinister, tra, trum)<br />

3) crus, cruris n (dexter, tra, trum)<br />

4) caput, itis n (longus, a, um)<br />

5) abdomen, inis n (acutus, a, um)<br />

6) symptoma, atis n (certus, a, um; incertus, a, um)<br />

7) corpus, oris n (adiposus, a, um)<br />

8) cor, cordis n (sanus, a, um)<br />

8


Task № 2.<br />

Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

nervous system, chronic ulcer, arterial vessel, long net, fracture <strong>of</strong> the thigh,<br />

foramen <strong>of</strong> the skull, long muscle <strong>of</strong> the head, disease <strong>of</strong> the nervous system, left<br />

lobe <strong>of</strong> the liver, edema <strong>of</strong> the lung, blood vessel, lymphatic vessel.<br />

Task № 3.<br />

Form the clinical terms and translate into English:<br />

I.<br />

1) lapar- (-tomia, -scopia, -algia, -rrhagia);<br />

2) splanchn- (-logia, -ectomia, -scopia, -algia);<br />

3) hepat- (-megalia, -ectomia, -therapia).<br />

II.<br />

1) -mycosis (bronch-, stomat-, dermat-);<br />

2) -lysis (chondr-, neur-, hydr-, haemat-);<br />

3) -ptosis (gastr-, nephr-, proct-, enter-).<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) ren, renis… ; 2) animal, alis… ; 3) rete, is… ; 4) calcar, aris… ; 5) splen,<br />

enis… ; 6) femur, oris… ; 7) phren, enis… ; 8) caput, it is… ; 9) systema, atis… ;<br />

10) cor, cordis… ; 11) pulmo, onis… ; 12) pes, pedis…<br />

9


neutrum.<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c)<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Add the correct endings:<br />

1) ossa capit… homin…<br />

2) angina pector…<br />

3) corpus lingu…<br />

4) symptomat… morbi<br />

5) neoplasma benign…<br />

6) sulfur depurat…<br />

7) foramina nutriti…<br />

8) cavum abdomin…<br />

9) ulcus duoden…<br />

10) plasma sanguine…<br />

<strong>The</strong> variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) –a; b) –ae; c) –us; d) –is; e) –um; f) –i.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />

1) splanchnoptosis a) extraction <strong>of</strong> the kidney<br />

2) splenomalacia b) examining <strong>of</strong> the body<br />

3) nephrectomia c) sinking down <strong>of</strong> the liver<br />

4) adenoma d) blood tumor<br />

5) somatoscopia e) bleeding <strong>of</strong> the kidney<br />

6) haematoma f) sinking down <strong>of</strong> the inner<br />

organs<br />

7) cephalalgia g) cutting <strong>of</strong> the abdomen<br />

10


8) nephrorrhagia h) headache<br />

9) hepatoptosis i) tumor <strong>of</strong> the gland<br />

10) laparotomia j) s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong> the spleen<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 1<br />

Content module № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />

nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> feminine gender endings. <strong>The</strong> exceptions. <strong>The</strong><br />

vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />

feminine gender. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension are <strong>of</strong>ten met in the anatomic<br />

terminology. <strong>The</strong> Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />

the 3-rd declension, on the base <strong>of</strong> which many clinical terms are formed, are not<br />

less important and widely-used.<br />

<strong>The</strong> detailed learning <strong>of</strong> the feminine endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension with the typical<br />

endings <strong>of</strong> Gen. sing., the Greek-Latin equivalents and suffixes promotes the<br />

enrichment <strong>of</strong> the students' vocabulary, the consolidation <strong>of</strong> the habits <strong>of</strong><br />

grammatically correct and well-considered use <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the typical endings <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

2. To know the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender in the vocabulary form.<br />

3. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension and word terminations.<br />

4. To know the most important suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension nouns.<br />

5. To know the stable combinations with the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension.<br />

6. To know how to determine the gender and the stem type <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd<br />

declension feminine nouns.<br />

7. To know how to agree the 1-st group adjectives with the 3-rd declension<br />

feminine nouns and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

8. To know how to translate the terms with the 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />

and the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

9. To know how to form the clinical terms with the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong><br />

the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension and the suffixes, to translate the<br />

terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3


3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic (interdisciplinary<br />

integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies.<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />

5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

4


1. What are the endings <strong>of</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension in Nom.<br />

sing. and Gen. sing.?<br />

2. What are the exceptions from the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender?<br />

3. What are the suffixes <strong>of</strong> feminine nouns and their meaning? Give<br />

examples.<br />

4. Name the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />

and word terminations.<br />

<strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English, write down and learn the vocabulary<br />

form <strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1) Tuberositas deltoidea. 2) Radix pulmonis. 3) Extremitas claviculae. 4)<br />

Cartilago thyreoidea. 5) Basis cranii externa. 6) Pars petrosa. 7) Cutis sicca. 8)<br />

Articulatio composita. 9) Cavitas pelvis. 10) Operatio chirurgica. 11) Extractio<br />

dentium. 12) Transfusio sanguinis. 13) Cuspis dentis. 14) Radix duplex. 15)<br />

Injectio intravenosa. 16) Solutio spirituosa.<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin, write down and learn the vocabulary form<br />

<strong>of</strong> the words:<br />

1) <strong>The</strong> venous blood, the arterial blood. 2) <strong>The</strong> optic axis. 3) <strong>The</strong> cartilages <strong>of</strong><br />

the larynx. 4) <strong>The</strong> blood vessel, the lymphatic vessel. 5) <strong>The</strong> examination <strong>of</strong> a<br />

patient. 6) <strong>The</strong> middle phalanx. 7) <strong>The</strong> body <strong>of</strong> the atlas. 8) <strong>The</strong> healthy teeth.<br />

3. Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) pars, partis f – part (tympanic, petrous, squamate); 2) margo, inis m –<br />

margin (interosseous, zygomatic, front); 3) canalis, is m – channel (optic,<br />

nutritional, incisive, pterygoid); 4) dens, dentis m – tooth (lactic, incisive, carious,<br />

deciduous); 5) auris, is f – ear (external, internal, middle).<br />

5


4. Analyse the terms, translate them into English:<br />

1) pododynia (podalgia); 2) myocardiodystrophia; 3) gastrorrhaphia; 4)<br />

cardiomyopathia; 5) hidrorrhoea; 6) stomatologus; 7) otorhinolaryngologus; 8)<br />

stenothorax; 9) pyelotomia; 10) uropoësis; 11) pneumolўsis; 12) angiocarditis; 13)<br />

gastrorrhexis; 14) desmolўsis; 15) anthropogen ěsis; 16) enterostenosis; 17)<br />

odontopoësis; 18) phlebosclerosis; 19) polyarthritis.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension have the endings <strong>of</strong> Nom. sing.<br />

and Gen. sing. shown in the table.<br />

Endings<br />

Examples<br />

Nom. sing. Gen. sing.<br />

-io<br />

-do<br />

-go<br />

-ōnis<br />

-ĭnis<br />

-ĭnis<br />

solutio, solutiōnis f – solution<br />

valetudo, valetudĭnis f – health<br />

cartilago, cartilagĭnis f – cartilage<br />

-as<br />

-ātis<br />

extremitas, extremitātis f – extremity<br />

-is<br />

-es<br />

parisyllabic<br />

-is<br />

-is<br />

naris, naris f – nostril<br />

fames, famis f – hunger<br />

-is<br />

(imparisyllabic)<br />

-idis<br />

-it-idis<br />

cuspis, cuspidis f – cusp<br />

gastritis, gastritidis f – gastritis<br />

-us<br />

-ūdis<br />

-ūtis<br />

incus, incūdis f – incus<br />

salus, salūtis f – health<br />

6


-s (with previous<br />

consonant)<br />

-tis<br />

frons, frontis f – forehead<br />

pars, partis f – part<br />

-ax<br />

-ix<br />

-ox<br />

-ux<br />

-nx<br />

-acis<br />

-īcis<br />

-ocis<br />

-ucis<br />

-ngis<br />

pax, pacis f – peace<br />

radix, radīcis f – root<br />

vox, vocis f – voice<br />

nux, nucis f – nut<br />

phalanx, phalangis f – phalanx, phalange<br />

<strong>The</strong> exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns below are the exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> feminine gender, they<br />

belong to masculine or neuter genders.<br />

<strong>The</strong> masculine gender:<br />

atlas, antis m – atlas<br />

axis, is m – axis<br />

canalis, is m – channel<br />

pulvis, ĕris m – powder<br />

sanguis, inis m – blood<br />

dens, dentis m – tooth<br />

thorax, ācis m – thorax<br />

larynx, yngis m – larynx<br />

pharynx, yngis m – pharynx<br />

coccyx, ÿgis m – coccyx<br />

tendo, ĭnis m – tendon<br />

margo, ĭnis m – margin<br />

7


<strong>The</strong> neuter gender<br />

pancreas, ătis n – pancreas<br />

vas, vasis n – vessel<br />

<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />

-io – means some action or the action result, e. g.: injectio, onis f – injection;<br />

auscultatio, onis f – auscultation;<br />

-īt-is – points to the inflammation. <strong>The</strong> terms are formed by adding the suffix -it-<br />

(with the ending -is) to the stem <strong>of</strong> the noun naming some organ, e. g.:<br />

encephălon, i n – encephalitis, itĭdis f;<br />

pancreas, ătis n – pancreatitis, itĭdis f;<br />

gaster, tris f – gastritis, itĭdis f;<br />

-ōs-is – points to the disease without inflammation, e. g.:<br />

mycosis, is f – mycosis;<br />

stenosis, is f – stenosis;<br />

sclerosis, is f – sclerosis;<br />

-iās-is – also means the disease without inflammation, e. g.:<br />

cholelithiāsis, is f – cholelithiasis;<br />

elephantiāsis, is f – elephantiasis.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin-Greek equivalents<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension feminine nouns<br />

Latin word Greek stem Meaning<br />

8


articulatio, onis f<br />

auris, is f<br />

cartilago, ĭnis f<br />

cutis, is f<br />

pelvis renalis<br />

arthrotchondrdermat-,<br />

dermpyel-<br />

joint, articulation<br />

ear<br />

cartilage<br />

skin<br />

calix (<strong>of</strong> the kidney)<br />

Exceptions<br />

dens, dentis m<br />

sanguis, ĭnis m<br />

tendo, ĭnis m<br />

vas, vasis n<br />

odonthaemat-,<br />

haemtenangi-<br />

tooth<br />

blood<br />

tendon<br />

vessel<br />

Word terminations<br />

– geněsis<br />

– lўsis<br />

– paresis<br />

– poësis<br />

– ptosis<br />

– rrhexis<br />

– sclerosis<br />

– stasis<br />

– stenosis<br />

– mycosis<br />

– necrosis<br />

origin, appearance<br />

disintegration, destruction, release from scars<br />

paresis, partial paralysis<br />

formation, secretion<br />

prolapse <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />

break<br />

induration, callosity<br />

stagnation<br />

narrowing<br />

fungoid disease<br />

necrosis, mortification<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

9


Task № 1.<br />

Form Gen. sing. and determine the stem <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension feminine<br />

nouns:<br />

sectio, cavitas, cutis (parisyllabic),<br />

(parisyllabic), phalanx, incus, hirudo, mucilago.<br />

solutio, salus, radix, pars, basis<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate the terms into English, determine the noun gender by the adjective<br />

endings:<br />

hydrops cardiacus, margo mastoideus, pancreas accessorium, vas capillare,<br />

operatio chirurgica, canalis incisivus, articulatio composita, cutis sicca.<br />

Task № 3.<br />

Form the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />

I. 1) odont(o) – (-algia, -rrhagia, -ectomia, -necrosis, -genes, -lithus);<br />

2) angi(o) – (-spasmus, -sclerosis, -paresis, -pathia, -necrosis, -tomia).<br />

II. 1) -sclerosis (arthr-, angi-, chondr-, ten-, pyel-);<br />

2) -mycosis (haemat-, stomat-, enter-, bronch-, colp-).<br />

Task № 4.<br />

Analyze the terms, determine the suffix and its meaning:<br />

cardiosclerosis, encephalitis, leucocytosis, hepatitis, nephritis, acidosis,<br />

chondrosis, duodenitis, stomatitis, arthrosis.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

10


Test № 1.<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) vas, vasis; 2) tuberositas, atis; 3) dens, dentis; 4) palpatio, onis; 5) tussis,<br />

is; 6) larynx, ngis; 7) pancreas, atis; 8) atlas, antis; 9) margo, inis; 10) bilis, is; 11)<br />

cartilago, inis; 12) phalanx, ngis.<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c)<br />

neutrum.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Agree the adjective with the noun:<br />

1) injection a) subcutaneus, b) subcutanea, c) subutaneum;<br />

2) vas a) lymphaticus, b) lymphatica, c) lymphaticum;<br />

3) sanguis a) venosus, b) venosa, c) venosum.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Find the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms:<br />

1) odontogenesis a) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the skin<br />

2) arthrectomia b) disease <strong>of</strong> the joints<br />

3) tenorrhaphia c) spasm <strong>of</strong> the vessel<br />

4) dermatitis d) formation <strong>of</strong> the blood<br />

5) arthropathia e) destruction <strong>of</strong> the cartilage<br />

6) haematopoësis f) hardening <strong>of</strong> the bone<br />

7) otoscopium g) excision <strong>of</strong> the joint<br />

8) chondrolysis h) instrument for examining <strong>of</strong><br />

the ear<br />

9) angiospasmus i) formation <strong>of</strong> the teeth<br />

10) osteosclerosis j) suture <strong>of</strong> the tendon<br />

11


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

12


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />

<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />

declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />

degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />

nouns ending in “sis” and Latin nouns like<br />

“febris” and others. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> stable<br />

combinations.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> terms derived from Greek are widely used in anatomic, pharmaceutical<br />

and clinical terminologies. <strong>The</strong> considerable part <strong>of</strong> these terms has the ending “sis”<br />

(basis, dosis, narcosis, necrosis etc.) To know the case endings, peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />

declining and agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with the Greek nouns ending in “sis” helps to<br />

the students to better master the structure <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

To know:<br />

- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns ending in “sis”;<br />

- the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> deelining <strong>of</strong> the Latin nouns febris, tussis, pertussis,<br />

pelvis, sitis.<br />

To know how:<br />

- to agree adjectives with the Greek nouns ending in “sis”;<br />

- to use the Greek nouns ending in “sis” in anatomic terminology and in<br />

prescription –writing;<br />

- to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

4. Parisyllabic nouns.<br />

5. Imparisyllabic nouns.<br />

Definition<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having an equal number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

<strong>The</strong> nouns having a different number <strong>of</strong> syllables in<br />

Nom. and Gen. sing.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns ending in –sis?<br />

2) What Latin nouns are declined like the Greek nouns ending in –sis?<br />

3) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the Greek nouns with the ending –ma<br />

in Nom. sing. and –atis in Gen. sing.?<br />

4) What are the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the noun vas, vasis n?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1) <strong>The</strong> tropic fever 2) <strong>The</strong> best prognosis 3) <strong>The</strong> worst prognosis 4) <strong>The</strong> large<br />

and small pelvis 5) <strong>The</strong> deep narcosis 6) <strong>The</strong> cirrhosis <strong>of</strong> the liver 7) <strong>The</strong> chronic<br />

dry cough 8) <strong>The</strong> dry necrosis<br />

4


2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1) internal basis <strong>of</strong> the skull 2) diaphragm <strong>of</strong> the mouth 3) pubic symphysis 4)<br />

nervous system 5) emphysema <strong>of</strong> lungs 6) cutaneous edema.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />

Graph № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> feminine nouns <strong>of</strong><br />

Greek origin ending in<br />

–sis<br />

<strong>The</strong> case endings<br />

Singularis<br />

Nom. -sis<br />

Gen. -is<br />

Dat. -i<br />

Acc. -im<br />

Abl. -i<br />

Pluralis<br />

Nom. -es<br />

Gen. -ium<br />

Dat. -ibus<br />

Acc. -es<br />

Abl. -ibus<br />

Graph № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining<br />

dosis, is f (dose)<br />

Nom.<br />

dosis<br />

Singularis<br />

doses<br />

Pluralis<br />

5


Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

dosis<br />

dosi<br />

dosim<br />

dosi<br />

dosium<br />

dosibus<br />

doses<br />

dosibus<br />

Some Latin nouns are declined like these nouns <strong>of</strong> Greek origin, e.g.:<br />

febris, is f – fever<br />

pelvis, is f – pelvis<br />

tussis, is f – cough<br />

pertussis, is f – whooping cough<br />

sitis, is f – thirst<br />

Graph № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> Greek origin ending in-ma<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining<br />

trauma, atis n (trauma)<br />

Singularis Pluralis<br />

trauma traumata<br />

traumatis traumatum<br />

traumati traumatis<br />

trauma traumata<br />

traumatis traumatis<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

<strong>The</strong> noun vas, vasis n (vessel)<br />

Singularis Pluralis<br />

vas<br />

vasa<br />

vasis<br />

vasorum<br />

Graph № 3<br />

6


Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

vasi<br />

vas<br />

vase<br />

vasis<br />

vasa<br />

vasis<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Translate and decline the word combinations:<br />

average dose; lymphatic vessel; large edema<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns and translate the terms into English;<br />

1) dosis, is f (maximus, a, um; minimus, a, um; letalis, e; toxicus, a, um);<br />

2) tussis, is f (humidus, a, um; siccus, a, um; chronicus, a, um);<br />

3) prognosis, is f (bonus, a, um; malus, a, um; optimus, a, um).<br />

Task № 3.<br />

Translate the terms into English:<br />

diaphragma pelvis; basis cranii externa; anastomosis venosa; asthma<br />

bronchiale; necrosis hepatis toxica.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the case <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) dosim; 2) basi; 3) tussis; 4) narcosi; 5) diagnoses; 6) pelvim; 7) prognosis;<br />

8) dosium; 9) phasis; 10) febres<br />

a) Nom.sing.; b) Nom.plur.; c) Gen.sing.; d) Gen.plur.; e) Acc.sing.; b)<br />

Dat.sing.; g) Abl.sing.<br />

Test № 2<br />

7


Find the correctly agreed terms:<br />

1) dosis media; 2) tussis ticcus; 3) rhizoma magna; 4) vas lymphaticus;<br />

5) prognosis bona; 6) basis externum; 7) pelvis major et minus; 8) diagnosis optima<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>undus; 10) vas sanguiferum.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

8


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th declension<br />

nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> third declension adjectives. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong><br />

stable combinations. <strong>The</strong> agreement with the nouns <strong>of</strong> the<br />

1-st, 2-nd, 3-rd declensions. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> present<br />

participles. <strong>The</strong> vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> use in the anatomic<br />

terminology. <strong>The</strong> degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives in<br />

the medical terminology.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> most <strong>of</strong> medical terms are the agreed attributes by their syntactical<br />

structure. Mastering <strong>of</strong> the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> adjectives and present<br />

participles, the degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the lexical minimum allows to<br />

develop and consolidate the practical habits <strong>of</strong> construction and translation <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the division <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension adjectives into 3 subgroups<br />

depending on the number <strong>of</strong> gender endings.<br />

2. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />

3. To know the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

4. To know the rule <strong>of</strong> forming the present participles.<br />

5. To know how to decline the 2-nd group adjectives.<br />

6. To know how to agree the 3-rd declension adjectives with the nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-<br />

st, 2-nd and 3-rd declensions.<br />

7. To know how to form the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison.<br />

8. To know how to form two- and many-word anatomic terms on the base <strong>of</strong><br />

new lexical material.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an<br />

adjective, the description <strong>of</strong> declensions,<br />

the determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem,<br />

the degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

3


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

2. Stem<br />

3. Present participle<br />

4. Comparison <strong>of</strong><br />

adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part <strong>of</strong> an adjective left after removing the<br />

inflection <strong>of</strong> the feminine gender.<br />

Formed by adding the ending –ns to the stems <strong>of</strong> the<br />

1-st and 2-nd conjugation verbs and the ending –ens<br />

to the stems <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd and 4-th conjugation verbs.<br />

<strong>The</strong> positive degree (gradus positivus), the<br />

comparative degree (gradus comparativus), the<br />

superlative degree (gradus superlativus).<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How many groups <strong>of</strong> adjectives are there in Latin?<br />

2. What adjectives belong to the 2-nd group?<br />

3. How is the stem <strong>of</strong> adjectives determined?<br />

4. How are the 3-rd declension adjectives declined?<br />

5. How are the present participles formed?<br />

6. How are the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong> adjectives formed?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English:<br />

1) Musculus biceps femoris. 2) Arteriae nasales posteriores laterales. 3)<br />

Canalis centralis medullae spinalis. 4) Arteriae gastricae breves. 5) Systema<br />

4


nervosum centrale. 6) Pars basilaris ossis ethmoidalis. 7) Ligamentum teres femoris.<br />

8) Venae pulmonales sinistrse. 9) Morbus insanabilis. 10) Injectio intramuscularis.<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1) Oval foramen. 2) Clavicular incisure <strong>of</strong> the chest bone. 3) Capillary vessel.<br />

4) Bronchial asthma. 5) <strong>The</strong> basic part <strong>of</strong> the occipital bone. 6) <strong>The</strong> facial nerve.<br />

7) <strong>The</strong> s<strong>of</strong>t ulcer. 8) <strong>The</strong> frontal region. 9) <strong>The</strong> nasal bone. 10) <strong>The</strong> alveolar<br />

channel.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan.<br />

Graph № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> 3-rd declension adjectives<br />

3 gender endings<br />

m f n<br />

-er -is -e<br />

celer, eris, ere<br />

acer, acris, acre<br />

saluber, bris, bre<br />

2 gender endings<br />

m f n<br />

-is -e<br />

frontalis, e<br />

dentalis, e<br />

articularis, e<br />

1 endings for all genders<br />

m f n<br />

Nom. sing. Gen. sing.<br />

par, paris<br />

recens, ntis<br />

Graph № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> case endings <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension<br />

adjectives (the vowel type)<br />

5


Singularis<br />

Nom. different<br />

Gen.<br />

–is<br />

Dat. –i<br />

Acc em (m f) Nom (n)<br />

Pluralis<br />

Nom. –es (m, f) –ia (n)<br />

Gen –ium<br />

Dat. –ibus<br />

Acc es (m f) ia (n)<br />

Graph № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension adjectives with the 1-st, 2-nd and 3-rd<br />

declension nouns.<br />

Pattern 1<br />

aqua, ae f<br />

remedium, i n<br />

saluber, bris, bre<br />

aër, aëris m<br />

Pattern 2<br />

os, ossis n<br />

crista, ae f<br />

sacralis, e<br />

musculus, i m<br />

Pattern 3<br />

tinctura, ae f<br />

6


sirupus, i m<br />

simplex, icis<br />

pulvis, eris m<br />

Graph № 4<br />

<strong>The</strong> Present partisiples<br />

<strong>The</strong> 1-st and 2-nd conjugation<br />

werbs<br />

<strong>The</strong> 3-rd and 4-th conjugation<br />

werbs<br />

the Present stem<br />

the ending -ns<br />

the ending -ens<br />

Gen. sing. -ntis<br />

Graph № 5<br />

<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> the comparative degree <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

7


E. g. Positivus Stem Comparativus<br />

long<br />

longus, a um<br />

long-<br />

longior (m, f), longius (n)<br />

red<br />

ruber, bra, brum<br />

rubr-<br />

rubrior (m, f), rubrius (n)<br />

healthy<br />

saluber, bris, bre<br />

salubr-<br />

salubrior (m, f), salubrius (n)<br />

short<br />

brevis, e<br />

brev-<br />

brevior (m, f), brevius (n)<br />

simple<br />

simplex, icis<br />

simplic-<br />

simplicior (m, f), simplicius (n)<br />

Graph № 6<br />

<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> the superlative degree <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

E. g. Positivus Stem Superlativus<br />

long<br />

longus, a um<br />

long-<br />

longissimus, a, um<br />

short<br />

brevis, e<br />

brev-<br />

brevissimus, a, um<br />

simple<br />

simplex, icis<br />

simplic-<br />

simplissimus, a, um<br />

red<br />

ruber, bra, brum<br />

rubr-<br />

ruberrimus, a, um<br />

healthy<br />

saluber, bris, bre<br />

salubr-<br />

saluberrimus, a, um<br />

similar<br />

similis, e<br />

simil-<br />

simillimus, a, um<br />

dissimilar<br />

dissimilis, e<br />

dissimil-<br />

disimillimus, a, um<br />

facile<br />

facilis, e<br />

facil-<br />

facillimus, a, um<br />

difficult<br />

difficilis, e<br />

difficil-<br />

difficillimus, a, um<br />

graceful<br />

gracilis, e<br />

gracil-<br />

gracillimus, a, um<br />

humil<br />

humilis, e<br />

humil-<br />

humillimus, a, um<br />

8


Graph № 7<br />

Irregular comparisons<br />

Positivus Comparativus Superlativus<br />

bonus, a, um (good)<br />

malus, a, um (bad)<br />

magnus, a, um (big)<br />

parvus, a, um (small)<br />

multus, a, um (many)<br />

melior, ius (better)<br />

peior, ius (worse)<br />

maior, ius (bigger)<br />

minor, us (smaller)<br />

plus, pluris (more)<br />

optimus, a, um (the best)<br />

pessimus, a, um (the worst)<br />

maximus, a, um (the biggest)<br />

minimus, a, um (the smallest)<br />

plurimus, a, um (the most)<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Form the comparative and superlative degrees <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

1) latus, a, um (wide); 2) dulcis, e (sweet); 3) celer, ĕris, ĕre (fast); 4) liber,<br />

era, erum (free); 5) utilus, e (useful); 6) niger, gra, grum (black); 7) sapiens, ntis<br />

(clever); 8) mollis, e (s<strong>of</strong>t); 9) longus, a, um (long); 10) recens, ntis (fresh),<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Agree the 3-rd declension adjectives with the 1-st, 2-nd and 3-rd declension<br />

nouns, translate the terms:<br />

1) sacralis, e (foramen, canal, crest);<br />

9


2) recens, ntis (milk, air, flower, decoction);<br />

3) renalis, e (vein, pelvis);<br />

4) centralis, e (artery, sulcus, vessel);<br />

5) abdominalis, e (cavity, aorta, region);<br />

6) saluber, bris, bre (ointment, juice, air, plant);<br />

7) lacrimalis, e (incisure, bone, part).<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the group <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

1) sacralis, e; 2) recens, ntis; 3) acutus, a, um; 4) latus, a, um; 5) niger, gra,<br />

grum; 6) alveolaris, e; 7) saluber, bris, bre; 8) lateralis, e; 9) simplex, icis; 10) acer,<br />

acris, acre; 11) dentalis, e; 12) asper, era, erum.<br />

a) 1-st group; b) 2-nd group.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Choose the correct variant <strong>of</strong> agreement:<br />

1) cartilago, inis f<br />

2) processus, us m a) articularis<br />

3) discus, i m<br />

4) facies, ei f b) articulare<br />

5) concha, ae f<br />

6) ligamentum, i n<br />

Test № 3<br />

Find the correctly agreed terms:<br />

10


1) foramen sacralis; 2) articulatio simplicis; 3) sulcus lacrimale; 4) ossa<br />

frontalia; 5) exitus letalis; 6) sinus renale; 7) herba saluber; 8) aёr recentis; 9) arteria<br />

centralis; 10) arcus dentale.<br />

Test № 4<br />

Find the corresponding translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />

1. Ramus perforans a) permanent teeth<br />

2. Costae fluctuantes b) corrective remedy<br />

3. Dentes permanentes c) returning typhus<br />

4. Pulvis laxans d) afferent vessels<br />

5. Aorta descendens e) perforating branch<br />

6. Remedium corrigens f) adjuvant remedy<br />

7. Typhus recurrents g) floating ribs<br />

8. Nervus perforans h) descending aorta<br />

9. Remedium adjuvans i) laxative powder<br />

10. Vasa afferentia j) perforating nerve<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №1<br />

Content module №3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision<br />

<strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong><br />

anatomic and histological terms”<br />

<strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />

declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />

degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives<br />

<strong>The</strong> learning <strong>of</strong> the fourth and fifth<br />

declension nouns. <strong>The</strong> exceptions. <strong>The</strong><br />

vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> stable combinations. <strong>The</strong> current<br />

test control <strong>of</strong> the module.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> great number <strong>of</strong> medical terms are the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns<br />

(sinus, processus, genu, abscessus, facies, caries, species etc.) Mastering <strong>of</strong> the<br />

lexical minimum. case endings, the most important exceptions to the rules <strong>of</strong> gender<br />

promotes the replenishment <strong>of</strong> the vocabulary, broadens the grammatical habits <strong>of</strong><br />

students.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns and the most<br />

important exceptions to the rules <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

2. To know how to decline the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns.<br />

3. To know how to agree the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st and 2 nd groups with the 4 th<br />

and 5 th declension nouns.<br />

4. To know how to form two- and many-word medical terms on the base <strong>of</strong><br />

new lexical material.<br />

5. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />

contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Russian language.<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Case.<br />

2. Declension.<br />

3. Stem.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1) What nouns belong to the 4 th declension? Give examples.<br />

2) Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns.<br />

3) Name the exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns.<br />

4) What nouns belong to the 5 th declension? Give examples.<br />

5) Name the case endings <strong>of</strong> the 5 th declension nouns.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate the terms into English:<br />

1) plexus venosus foraminis ovalis;<br />

2) genu dextrum and sinistrum;<br />

3) habitus bonus aegroti;<br />

4) articulatio genus;<br />

5) dies criticus morbi;<br />

6) cornu anterius et posterius;<br />

7) facies Hippocratica;<br />

4


8) facies articularis;<br />

9) caries dentium;<br />

10) usus internus.<br />

2. Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

Arch <strong>of</strong> the aorta; 2) dislocation <strong>of</strong> the knee; 3) the acute period <strong>of</strong> the insult;<br />

4) the left hepatic duct; 5) cartilage <strong>of</strong> the acoustic meatus; 6) fingers <strong>of</strong> the right<br />

hand; 7) palmar venous arch; 8) the present <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> the patient; 9) internal use,<br />

external use; 10) frontal sinus.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic`s contents:<br />

Graph № 1.<br />

Declension 4<br />

Typical signs Case endings Examples<br />

Nom.sing.<br />

-us (m)<br />

-u (n)<br />

Singularis<br />

m n<br />

Nom. –us -u<br />

Gen. –us -us<br />

Dat. –ui -u<br />

Acc. – um -u<br />

Abl. –u -u<br />

arcus, us m<br />

processus, us m<br />

genu, us n<br />

cornu, us n<br />

Gen. sing.<br />

Pluralis<br />

Exceptions<br />

-us (m, n)<br />

m<br />

n<br />

manus, us f<br />

5


Nom. –us -ua<br />

Gen. –uum -uum<br />

Dat. –ibus –ibus<br />

Acc. –us -ua<br />

Abl. –ibus -ibus<br />

acus, us f<br />

quercus, us f<br />

pinus, us f<br />

Casus<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Dat.<br />

Acc.<br />

Abl.<br />

Graph № 2.<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns<br />

sinus, us m – sinus genu, us n - knee<br />

sin- -stem gen- -stem<br />

Singularis<br />

Pluralis<br />

m<br />

n m n<br />

sinus genu sinus genua<br />

sinus genus sinuum genuum<br />

sinui genu sinibus genibus<br />

sinum genu sinus genua<br />

sinu genu sinibus genibus<br />

Graph № 3.<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> the adjectives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st and 2 nd groups<br />

with the 4 th declension nouns.<br />

1) sinus, us m –sinus frontalis, e -frontal<br />

signoideus, a, um – sigmoid<br />

sacralis, e – sacral<br />

2) cornu, us n – horn coccygeus, a, um – coccygeal<br />

sacralis, e – sacral<br />

3) manus, us f – hand dexter, tra, trum – right<br />

sinister, tra, trum – left<br />

6


suffix<br />

-t -us<br />

-s -us<br />

-x -us<br />

Graph № 4<br />

<strong>The</strong> suffixes <strong>of</strong> the 4 th declension nouns<br />

Examples<br />

ductus, us m – (from duco, duxi, ductum, ere – to lead, to conduct)<br />

visus, us m – sight (from video, vidi, visum, ere – to look)<br />

plexus, us m –<br />

Declinatio 5<br />

Graph № 5<br />

Typical signs Case endings Examples<br />

Nom.sing.<br />

-es (f)<br />

Gen.sing.<br />

-ei<br />

Sing. Plur.<br />

Nom. –es -es<br />

Gen. – ei -erum<br />

Dat. – ei -ebus<br />

Acc. – em -es<br />

Abl. –e -ebus<br />

caries, ei f<br />

facies, ei f<br />

rabies, ei f<br />

scabies, ei f<br />

Exceptions<br />

meridies, ei m – south<br />

dies, ei m – day<br />

(in medical<br />

terminology)<br />

Casus<br />

Nom.<br />

Gen.<br />

Graph № 6<br />

<strong>The</strong> pattern <strong>of</strong> declining <strong>of</strong> the 5 th declension nouns<br />

facies, ei f – surfacc (stem faci); dies, ei m – day (stem di-<br />

Singularis<br />

Pluralis<br />

facies dies facies dies<br />

faciei diei facierum dierum<br />

7


Dat.<br />

faciei<br />

diei<br />

faciebus<br />

diebus<br />

Acc.<br />

faciem<br />

diem<br />

facies<br />

dies<br />

Abl.<br />

facie<br />

die<br />

facebus<br />

diebus<br />

Graph № 7<br />

<strong>The</strong> agreement <strong>of</strong> adjectives with the 5 th declension nouns<br />

1) facies, ei f – surface internus, a, um – internal<br />

dorsalis, e – dorsal<br />

2) caries, ei f – caries chronicus, a, um – chronic<br />

complicates, a, um – complicated<br />

3) dies, ei m – day criticus, a, um – critical<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Decline the terms:<br />

1) arcus zygomaticus (zygomatic arch)<br />

2) cornu sacrale (sacral horn)<br />

3) caries pr<strong>of</strong>unda (deep caries)<br />

4) manus dextra (right hand)<br />

Task № 2<br />

Agree the adjectives with the 4 th and 5 th declension nouns:<br />

1) cornu, us n – horn<br />

2) arcus, us m – arch<br />

3) plexus, us m – plexus<br />

coccygeus, a, um – cocygeal<br />

dentalis, e – dental<br />

cervicalis, e – cervical<br />

8


4) dies, ei m – day<br />

criticus, a, um - critical<br />

5) facies, ei f – surface<br />

anterior, ius – anterior<br />

6) caries, ei f – caries<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>undus, a, um – deep<br />

7) visus, us m – sight<br />

bonus, a, um – good<br />

8) processus, us m – process spinosus, a, um – spinous<br />

9) sinus, us m – sinus<br />

frontalis, e – frontal<br />

10)exitus, us m – exit<br />

letalis, e – lethal<br />

Task № 3<br />

Put the terms in Gen.sing. and Nom.plur.<br />

1) spiritus aethylicus – ethylic spirit<br />

2) manus sinistra – left hand<br />

3) cornu coccygeum – coccygeal horn<br />

4) genu dextrum – right knee<br />

5) sinus sigmoideus – sigmoid sinus<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) processus, us . . .; 2) facies, ei . . .; 3) arcus, us . . .; 4) Quercus, us . . .; 5)<br />

meridies, ei . . .; 6) scabies, ei . . .; 7) pulsus, us . . .; 8) caries, ei . . .; 9)<br />

abscessus, us . . .; 10) manus, us . . .; 11) exitus, us . . .; 12) genu, us . . .; 13)<br />

habitus, us . . .; 14) cornu, us . . .; 15) sinus, us . .<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum<br />

Test № 2<br />

Determine the case <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) ductuum; 2) genua; 3) spiritus; 4) cornua; 5) cariei; 6) diem; 7) rerum; 8)<br />

processus; 9) Quercus; 10) genus<br />

9


Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) Nom.sing; b) Nom.plur; c) Gen.sing; d) Gen.plur; e) Acc.sing.;<br />

f) Acc.plur.<br />

Test № 3<br />

Find the terms agreed in a wrong way:<br />

a) cornu anterius et posterius;<br />

b) manus dextra;<br />

c) habitus bonum;<br />

d) sinus frontalis;<br />

e) cornu coccygeus;<br />

f) caries chronicus;<br />

g) genu dexter et sinister;<br />

h) spiritus aethylicus;<br />

i) plexus venosis;<br />

j) exitus letale;<br />

k) usus internus;<br />

l) facies Hippocratica<br />

Test № 4<br />

Choose the corresponding variant <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the Latin terms:<br />

1) arcus costalis<br />

a) Hippocrate’s face<br />

2) cornu dextrum et sinistrum b) alveolar process<br />

3) plexus nervosus<br />

c) bones <strong>of</strong> the face<br />

4) processus alveolaris<br />

d) caries <strong>of</strong> the tooth<br />

5) abscessus linguae<br />

e) sigmoid sinus<br />

6) sinus sigmoideus<br />

f) abscess <strong>of</strong> the tongue<br />

7) facies Hippocratica<br />

g) critical day<br />

8) ossa faciei<br />

h) right and left horn<br />

9) caries dentis<br />

i) costal arch<br />

10)dies criticus<br />

j) nervous plexus<br />

10


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 1<br />

Content modules №№ 1-3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic<br />

and histological terms”<br />

1. Phonetics and the structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and<br />

histological terms.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the nouns and adjectives<br />

<strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd declensions as the way <strong>of</strong><br />

building <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms.<br />

3. <strong>The</strong> system learning <strong>of</strong> the 3 rd , 4 th , 5 th<br />

declension nouns, the 2 nd group adjectives, the<br />

degrees <strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

<strong>The</strong> summary module control.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2007<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />

terminology” includes the free reading <strong>of</strong> the Latin text, using <strong>of</strong> the alphabet in the<br />

work with the dictionary, the correct writing <strong>of</strong> the sounds <strong>of</strong> the Latin alphabet; the<br />

practical use <strong>of</strong> the Greek letter combinations in the words derived from Greek; free<br />

mastering <strong>of</strong> the lexical material, the skill to classify the words by cases with the<br />

purpose <strong>of</strong> correct writing <strong>of</strong> endings, free making up <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological<br />

terms on the base <strong>of</strong> the acquired grammatical knowledge. <strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

“<strong>The</strong> summary test <strong>of</strong> the 1-st term” is in the checking <strong>of</strong> the quality <strong>of</strong> the<br />

knowledge, skills and habits acquired by students.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the Latin alphabet, the classification <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants,<br />

diphthongs, letter combinations, long and short syllables, the rules <strong>of</strong> stress.<br />

2. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />

the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns.<br />

3. To know the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />

gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem, the rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees<br />

<strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />

5. To know the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the paradigm, the<br />

peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

6. To know the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the 1-st<br />

and 2-nd group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />

7. To know how to determine the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong> nouns and<br />

adjectives, to write them in the vocabulary form.<br />

3


8. To know how to agree adjectives with nouns, to form two- and many-word<br />

anatomic terms.<br />

9. To know how to translate the terms from Latin into English and on the<br />

contrary.<br />

10. To know how to form the clinical terms <strong>of</strong> separate terms-elements, to<br />

translate them from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

English language<br />

Russian language, English language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

To know how to write the letters <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin alphabet, to differentiate letters<br />

and sounds, diphthongs and<br />

monophthongs.<br />

Words in English and Russian are<br />

pronounced with extra emphasis on one<br />

syllable, which is called “stress”.<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a noun,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the noun stem, the<br />

nominative and genitive cases, their part<br />

in the construction <strong>of</strong> terms. <strong>The</strong><br />

grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> an adjective,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> declensions, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the adjective stem, the<br />

rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees <strong>of</strong><br />

comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives, the formation<br />

<strong>of</strong> the past and present participles.<br />

4


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Alphabet<br />

Diphthong<br />

Phoneme<br />

Phonetics<br />

Stress<br />

Penult<br />

Antepenult<br />

Term<br />

Gender<br />

Number<br />

Case<br />

Declension<br />

Stem<br />

Definition<br />

<strong>The</strong> graphic signs – letters arranged in the certain<br />

order.<br />

A combination <strong>of</strong> two vowels which are pronounced<br />

as one sound or one syllable.<br />

<strong>The</strong> minimum speech unit which is singled out <strong>of</strong> the<br />

continuous speech stream.<br />

<strong>The</strong> sound structure <strong>of</strong> the language; the branch <strong>of</strong><br />

linguistics which studies the sound structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

language.<br />

Stress is an extra emphasis on one syllable in the<br />

words.<br />

Penult is the next to last syllable.<br />

Antepenult is the syllable before the penult.<br />

A term is a word or a word-combination which is a<br />

name <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional concept in any sphere <strong>of</strong><br />

science, production or arts.<br />

Masculine – genus masculinum (m); feminine –<br />

genus femininum (f); neuter – genus neutrum (n).<br />

When a noun names one thing, we say it in singular,<br />

when it names more than one thing, we say it in<br />

plural.<br />

A Latin noun has various terminations to show<br />

whether it is used as the subject or the object <strong>of</strong> a<br />

verb, whether it indicates the idea <strong>of</strong> possession, and<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> agreed attribute<br />

so on. <strong>The</strong> various inflected forms <strong>of</strong> a noun are<br />

called “cases”.<br />

A list <strong>of</strong> all the cases <strong>of</strong> a noun is called the<br />

declension <strong>of</strong> the noun.<br />

<strong>The</strong> part in all nouns <strong>of</strong> any declension left after<br />

removing the inflection <strong>of</strong> the genitive singular.<br />

<strong>The</strong> adjective agreed with the noun in gender, case<br />

and number.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> pronunciation <strong>of</strong> vowels and consonants, diphthongs, letter<br />

combinations.<br />

2. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> stress, long and short syllables.<br />

3. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the noun, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing nouns in<br />

the vocabulary, the determination <strong>of</strong> the stem, gender and declension <strong>of</strong><br />

nouns.<br />

4. Name the grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> the adjectives, division into groups,<br />

gender endings, the rule <strong>of</strong> finding the stem, the rules <strong>of</strong> forming the degrees<br />

<strong>of</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> adjectives.<br />

5. Name the rules <strong>of</strong> constructing and the ways <strong>of</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constructions “the agreed attribute”, morphological and syntactical structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> two- and many-word terms with different types <strong>of</strong> attributes.<br />

6. Name the typical signs <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the paradigm, the<br />

peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the nouns – exceptions to the rule <strong>of</strong> gender.<br />

7. Name the prepositions used with Acc. and Abl., the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the<br />

prepositions in and sub. Give the example.<br />

8. Name the morphological signs <strong>of</strong> the 1-st and 2-nd group adjectives, the past<br />

and present participles, the rules <strong>of</strong> writing them in the vocabulary form.<br />

9. Name the Greek-Latin equivalents <strong>of</strong> the nouns <strong>of</strong> all declensions, the 1-st and<br />

2-nd group adjectives, the word terminations.<br />

6


4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Test tasks for module control on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />

terminology”<br />

(Module 1. Phonetic, lexical and grammatical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic “<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> anatomic and histological terms”)<br />

Task 1 (8 points).<br />

Choose the right pronunciation variant <strong>of</strong> the consonant c:<br />

1) acidum; 2) cervicalis; 3) cranium; 4) clavicula; 5) occiput; 6) cyanosis; 7)<br />

caecus; 8) pancreas.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) [ ts ]<br />

b) [ k ]<br />

c) [ ts ], [ k ]<br />

d) [ k ], [ ts ]<br />

Task 2 (8 points).<br />

Choose the right pronunciation variant <strong>of</strong> the consonant s:<br />

1) fissura; 2) extensor; 3) nasalis; 4) accessorius; 5) incisura; 6) dorsalis; 7)<br />

usus; 8) transfusio.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) [ s ]<br />

b) [ z ]<br />

Task 3 (8 points).<br />

Determine what syllable is stressed:<br />

1) palpebra; 2) dentatus; 3) felleus; 4) pilula; 5) fibrosus; 6) Belladonna;7)<br />

tibia; 8) fissura; 9) frigidus; 10) decoctum.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers: a) penult<br />

b) antepenult<br />

7


Task 4 (2 points).<br />

<strong>The</strong> declension <strong>of</strong> nouns is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />

a) Nom. sing.;<br />

b) Gen. sing.;<br />

c) Nom. plur.;<br />

d) Gen. plur.<br />

Task 5 (2 points).<br />

<strong>The</strong> gender <strong>of</strong> nouns is determined by the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />

a) Nom. sing.;<br />

b) Gen. sing.;<br />

c) Nom. plur.;<br />

d) Gen. plur.<br />

Task 6 (2 points).<br />

<strong>The</strong> stem <strong>of</strong> a noun is found by dropping the ending <strong>of</strong>:<br />

a) Nom. sing.;<br />

b) Gen. sing.;<br />

c) Nom. plur.;<br />

d) Gen. plur.<br />

Task 7 (2 points).<br />

Latin adjectives are divided info:<br />

a) 2 groups;<br />

b) 3 groups;<br />

c) 4 groups;<br />

d) are not divided into groups.<br />

Task 8 (8 points).<br />

8


Determine the declension <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) abscessus, us m; 2) haema, atis n; 3) scabies, ei f; 4) sulcus, i m; 5)<br />

apertura, ae f; 6) canalis, is m; 7) diameter, tri f; 8) corpus, oris n.<br />

a) I b) II c) III d) IV e) V<br />

Task 9 (8 points).<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the nouns:<br />

1) cornu, us … ; 2) facies, ei … ;<br />

3) dens, dentis … ; 4) caput, itis … ;<br />

5) ductus, us … ; 6) os, ossis … ;<br />

7) struma, ae … ; 8) musculus, i …<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />

Task 10 (8 points).<br />

Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />

1) pelvis … ; 2) cornu … ; 3) periodus … ; 4) tuberculum … ; 5) facies … ;<br />

6) columna …;<br />

7) processus … ; 8) pars … .<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) pharyngeus, a, um<br />

b) major, ius<br />

c) spinosus, a, um<br />

d) criticus, a, um<br />

e) basilaris, e<br />

f) vertebralis, e<br />

g) coccygeus, a, um<br />

h) articularis, e<br />

Task 11 (8 points).<br />

Determine the gender <strong>of</strong> the adjectives:<br />

9


1) ovalis; 2) simplex; 3) sinistrum; 4) lata; 5) zygomaticus; 6) superior; 7)<br />

dexter; 8) frontale.<br />

a) masculinum; b) femininum; c) neutrum.<br />

Task 12 (8 points).<br />

Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) os<br />

2) incisura a) lacrimalis<br />

3) canalis b) lacrimale<br />

4) sacculus<br />

Task 13 (8 points).<br />

Choose the numbers <strong>of</strong> the rightly agreed terms:<br />

1) os brevis; 2) foramen ovale; 3) ligamentum latus; 4) facies interna; 5)<br />

articulatio simplex; 6) musculus pr<strong>of</strong>undum; 7) cornu coccygeum; 8)<br />

incisura claviculare.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №2<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />

<strong>The</strong> verb: the verb categories. <strong>The</strong><br />

imperative mood. <strong>The</strong> indicative mood <strong>of</strong> the<br />

present tense, active and passive voices. <strong>The</strong><br />

subjunctive mood in the prescription – writing: the<br />

verb fio, fiĕri. Attention to the translation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

third person singular and plural <strong>of</strong> the passive<br />

voice. <strong>The</strong> stable prescription combinations.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> verb takes the important place in the system <strong>of</strong> medical terms.<br />

It is impossible to translate elementary sentences, to write and translate prescription<br />

without mastering the personal endings <strong>of</strong> active and passive voices, the principles<br />

<strong>of</strong> forming the imperative and subjunctive moods <strong>of</strong> verbs, the peculiarities <strong>of</strong><br />

translation etc.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the basic categories <strong>of</strong> the verb.<br />

2. To know the basic ending <strong>of</strong> the active and passive voices.<br />

3. To know the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Praesens indicativi activi et<br />

passivi.<br />

4. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the 2 nd person singular and plural <strong>of</strong> the<br />

imperative mood.<br />

5. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the subjunctive mood.<br />

6. To know how to find the stem and to determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />

7. To know how to form Singular and Plural imperative <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />

8. To know how to form Praesens inducativi activi et passivi <strong>of</strong> verbs.<br />

9. To know how to translate the verb forms from Latin into English.<br />

10. To know how to use the verbs in the prescription forms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Russian language and English language<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a verb,<br />

3


the description <strong>of</strong> conjugations, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the verb stem, the<br />

imperative mood.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Person<br />

2. Number<br />

3. Tense<br />

4. Mood<br />

5. Voice<br />

6. Conjugation<br />

Who is the subject, i. e., who performs the action,<br />

from the speaker’s point <strong>of</strong> view.<br />

How many subjects, singular or plural.<br />

<strong>The</strong> time <strong>of</strong> action; Latin has six tenses.<br />

<strong>The</strong> manner <strong>of</strong> indicating the action or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being<br />

<strong>of</strong> the verb; like English, Latin has the indicative<br />

(which “indicates” facts), the imperative (which<br />

orders actions), and the subjunctive (which describes,<br />

in particular, hypothetical or potential actions).<br />

An indication, with transitive verbs (those that can<br />

take direct objects), <strong>of</strong> whether the subject performs<br />

the action (the active voice) or receives it (passive).<br />

Latin verbs are divided into four conjugations.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. List five characteristics <strong>of</strong> Latin verbs. Characterize each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />

2. How many conjugations are Latin verbs divided into?<br />

3. How is the conjugation determined?<br />

4


4. In what forms are Latin verbs written down into the vocabulary?<br />

5. What are the personal endings for the active voice?<br />

6. What are the personal endings for the passive voice?<br />

7. In what way are the personal endings added to the verb stems?<br />

8. How is the singular imperative formed?<br />

9. How is the plural imperative formed?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs: videre (to see); agitare (to shake<br />

up); scire (to know); dividere (to divide); tegere (to cover); curare (to<br />

treat); docere (to teach); repetere (to repeat); miscere (to mix); solvere<br />

(to dissolve).<br />

2. Find the stem <strong>of</strong> the verbs given in the task 1.<br />

3. Form Singular and Plural imperative <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />

agitare (to shake up) discere (to learn)<br />

vertere (to turn over) nutrire (to feed)<br />

addere (to add)<br />

docere (to teach)<br />

4. Translate into English:<br />

1. Solve tabulettam in aqua.<br />

2. Misce. Da. Signa.<br />

3. Da in tabulettis.<br />

4. Praepara tincturam.<br />

5. Studete linguam Latinam bene (well)!<br />

5. Translate into Latin:<br />

2. Be healthy.<br />

3. Sterilize the mixture.<br />

4. Give in gelatinous capsules.<br />

5. Prepare and divide the mass <strong>of</strong> the pills.<br />

6. Don`t injure!<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structurological plan <strong>of</strong> the topic’s contents:<br />

Graph № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> verb (verbum)<br />

<strong>The</strong> verb categories<br />

Person<br />

Number<br />

Tense<br />

Mood<br />

Voice<br />

(persona)<br />

(numerus)<br />

(tempus)<br />

(modus)<br />

(vox)<br />

persona prima<br />

Singularis<br />

6 tenses<br />

Indicative<br />

Active<br />

(1 st person)<br />

Pluralis<br />

(only<br />

Imperative<br />

Passive<br />

persona<br />

Praesens is<br />

Subjunctive<br />

secunda<br />

learned)<br />

(2 nd person)<br />

persona tertia<br />

(3 rd person)<br />

Graph № 2.<br />

Conjugations<br />

<strong>The</strong> infinitive <strong>The</strong> stem <strong>The</strong> stem ending Conjugation<br />

signare – to designare<br />

studere – to study<br />

dividere – to divide<br />

diluere – to dissolve<br />

audire – to listen<br />

signa -<br />

stude -<br />

divid –<br />

dilu –<br />

audi –<br />

-a-<br />

-ethe<br />

consonant,<br />

rarely –u-<br />

-i-<br />

I<br />

II<br />

III<br />

IV<br />

6


N. B. To find the present stem, it is necessary to drop the –re from the<br />

infinitives <strong>of</strong> the 1 st , 2 nd and 4-th conjugations, and the -ere from the infinitives <strong>of</strong><br />

the 3 rd conjugation.<br />

Graph № 3.<br />

<strong>The</strong> vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> verbs<br />

<strong>The</strong> 1 st person<br />

<strong>The</strong> 1 st person<br />

<strong>The</strong> supine (the<br />

<strong>The</strong> present active<br />

sing.,<br />

present<br />

sing., past perfect<br />

verbal noun)<br />

infinitive<br />

active,<br />

indicative<br />

-i<br />

-um<br />

-re<br />

mood<br />

-o<br />

do<br />

dedi<br />

datum<br />

dare<br />

misceo<br />

miscui<br />

mextum<br />

miscere<br />

divido<br />

divisi<br />

divisum<br />

dividere<br />

constituo<br />

constitui<br />

constitutum<br />

constituere<br />

recipio<br />

recipi<br />

receptum<br />

recipere<br />

nutrio<br />

nutrivi<br />

nutritum<br />

nutrere<br />

forms.<br />

N. B. For medical students it is enough to know the first and the fourth verb<br />

Graph № 4.<br />

Imperative mood<br />

<strong>The</strong> singular imperative<br />

<strong>The</strong> plural imperative<br />

infinitive – -re te - I, II, IV<br />

conjugations<br />

Stem +<br />

ite - III<br />

conjugation<br />

7


Conjungation Infinitive Stem Singularis<br />

imperative<br />

Plural<br />

imperative<br />

first dare – to give da- da da-te<br />

second miscere – to mix misce- misce misce-te<br />

third dividere – to divide divid- divide divid-ite<br />

fourth audire – to listen audi- audi audi-te<br />

Graph № 5.<br />

<strong>The</strong> personal endings <strong>of</strong> the present indicative active and passive<br />

Person Active Passive<br />

Sing Plur Sing Plur<br />

1 st person<br />

2 nd person<br />

3 rd person<br />

-o<br />

-s<br />

-t<br />

-mus<br />

-tis<br />

-nt<br />

-or<br />

-ris<br />

-tur<br />

-mur<br />

-mini<br />

-ntur<br />

N. B. <strong>The</strong> personal endings are added to the present stem.<br />

Graph № 6.<br />

<strong>The</strong> verbs in prescription<br />

Infinitive Conjugation Imperative mood Subjunctive mood<br />

Recipere<br />

(to take)<br />

Miscere<br />

(to mix)<br />

Dare<br />

(to give)<br />

III<br />

II<br />

I<br />

Recipe (take)<br />

Misce (mix)<br />

Da (give)<br />

–––<br />

Misceatur/misceantur<br />

(let it be mixed let them<br />

be mixed)<br />

Detur (let it be given)<br />

Dentur (let them be<br />

given)<br />

8


Signare<br />

I<br />

Signa (mark)<br />

(to mark)<br />

Signetur (let it be<br />

Sterilisare<br />

I<br />

Sterilisa (sterilize)<br />

marked)<br />

(to sterilize)<br />

Solvere<br />

III<br />

Solve (solve)<br />

Sterilisetur (let it be<br />

(to solve)<br />

sterilized)<br />

Solvetur (let it be<br />

Repetere<br />

III<br />

Repete (repeat)<br />

solved); Solventur (let<br />

(to repeat)<br />

them be solved)<br />

Repetatur (let it be<br />

Formare<br />

I<br />

Forma (form)<br />

repeated)<br />

(to form)<br />

Vertere<br />

III<br />

Verte (turn)<br />

Formetur (let it be<br />

(to turn)<br />

formed) Formentur (let<br />

them be formed)<br />

Fieri<br />

irregular verb<br />

–––<br />

–––<br />

(to be made, to be<br />

formed)<br />

Fiat/Fiant (let there be<br />

made)<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

1. Do ex. 1, p. 43 (the manual)<br />

2. Ex. 3, p. 43<br />

3. Translate the sentences into English: ex. 2, p. 43<br />

4. Learn the Latin sayings and aphorisms: p. 44.<br />

9


B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />

1) filtrare; 2) audire; 3) dividere; 4) nocere; 5) tegere; 6) formare; 7) habere; 8)<br />

nutrire; 9) sumere; 10) vertere; 11) vocare; 12) repetere; 13) miscere; 14)<br />

terere; 15) distinguere.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) I; b) II; c) III; d) IV.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Form the plural imperative <strong>of</strong> the verbs using the right ending:<br />

1) palpare; 2) munire; 3) recipere; 4) sterilisare; 5) miscere; 6) dividere; 7)<br />

auscultare; 8) nutrire; 9) vertere; 10) solvere; 11) dare; 12) repetere; 13)<br />

signare; 14) formare; 15) nocere.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> the answers:<br />

a) –te; b) –ite.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module №2<br />

Content module №1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />

<strong>The</strong> chemical nomenclature. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong><br />

elements, salts, oxides, esters.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Chemical nomenclature is a classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />

elements and their compounds which are used as medicinal substances. Neither a<br />

formula nor the symbol <strong>of</strong> a chemical element but its Latin name is given in<br />

prescriptions.<br />

<strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> using the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds in prescriptions<br />

are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Gen.<br />

sing. <strong>of</strong> this compounds is formed. So it is important to know the Latin names <strong>of</strong><br />

chemical elements, the ways <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts,<br />

esters and to know how to use them in prescriptions.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know what the chemical nomenclature is.<br />

2. To know what Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are.<br />

3. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> acids, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> acids.<br />

4. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> oxides, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong><br />

oxides.<br />

5. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> salts, the way <strong>of</strong> the forming <strong>of</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> salts.<br />

6. To know how to translate the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds from Latin into<br />

English and on the contrary.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

School course <strong>of</strong> chemistry<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements,<br />

the structure <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts and<br />

esters.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Chemical nomenclature<br />

2. Chemical element<br />

3. Acid<br />

4. Oxide<br />

5. Salt<br />

6. Ester<br />

A classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />

elements and compounds which are used as<br />

medicinal substances.<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter noun having the<br />

ending –um in Nom. sing.<br />

A chemical compound having a sour taste.<br />

Combination <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> an average degree <strong>of</strong><br />

oxidation with oxygen.<br />

Compound substance, combination <strong>of</strong> alkali and acid<br />

in one.<br />

Organic combination containing oxygen.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What does chemical nomenclature include?<br />

2. What are the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements?<br />

3. How are the names <strong>of</strong> acids formed?<br />

4. How are the names <strong>of</strong> oxides formed?<br />

5. How are the names <strong>of</strong> salts formed?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Translate into English, put in Gen. sing.:<br />

Acidum chloricum, Acidum nitricum, Acidum nitrōsum, Acidum<br />

acetylsalicylicum, Acidum hydrosulfuricum, Zinci oxydum, Magnesii peroxydum,<br />

4


Ferri oxydum, Papaverini hydrochloridum, Natrii iodidum, Argenti nitras, Natrii<br />

salicylas, Natrii hydrocarbonas, Calcii phosphas, Bismuthi subnitras, Natrii nitris,<br />

Sulfacylum-natrium, Norsulfazolum-natrium, Thiopentalum-natrium, Adrenalini<br />

hydrotartras, Oxacillinum-natrium, Kalii sulfis, Kalii chloridum.<br />

2. Translate into Latin:<br />

Boric acid, salicylic acid, sulphureous acid, nitric acid, nitrous acid, acetic<br />

acid, atropin sulphate, codeine phosphate, ephedrine hydrochloride, magnesium<br />

peroxide, sodium sulphite, sodium nitrite, ammonium bromide, potassium iodide,<br />

aluminium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide, thiopentalum-sodium, sulphacylumsodium,<br />

sodium hydrocarbonate.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Chemical nomenclature is a classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />

elements and their compounds which are used as medicinal substances. Neither a<br />

formula nor the symbol <strong>of</strong> a chemical element but its Latin name is given in<br />

prescriptions.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are the neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension<br />

ending in -um. E. g.: Kalium, i n – potassium; Oxygenium, i n – oxygen; Zincum, i<br />

n – zinc.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are two exceptions: Sulfur, ǔris n – sulphur; Phosphorus, i m –<br />

phosphorus.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids consist <strong>of</strong> the noun acidum, i n and the agreed adjective<br />

characterizing the degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation.<br />

5


1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the<br />

suffix -ic-um. E .g.: acidum salicylicum – salicylic acid; acidum sulfuricum –<br />

sulphuric acid.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the acids with low degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the<br />

suffix -os-um. E.g.: acidum sulfurosum – sulphureous acid; acidum nitrosum –<br />

nitrous acid.<br />

3. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the prefix<br />

hydro – and the suffix -ic-um. E.g.: acidum hydrochloricum – hydrochloric acid;<br />

acidum hydrosulfuricum – hydrosulphuric acid.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxides<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxides (oxydum, i n), peroxides (peroxydum, i n) and<br />

hydroxides (hydroxydum, i n) consist <strong>of</strong> two nouns: in the first place the name <strong>of</strong><br />

cation is put (a neuter noun <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in Genetivus), in the second<br />

place the name <strong>of</strong> anion is put (a neuter noun <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension in<br />

Nominativus). E.g.: Zinci oxydum – zinc oxide; Hydrogenii peroxydum – hydrogen<br />

peroxide; Calcii hydroxydum – calcium hydroxide.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> salts<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> salts consist <strong>of</strong> the name <strong>of</strong> cation in Gen. sing. and the name<br />

<strong>of</strong> anion in Nom. sing. Both cation and anion are nouns.<br />

Salts Examples Prefixes or suffixes<br />

in<br />

the names <strong>of</strong> anions<br />

1. With larger<br />

Natrii sulfas<br />

-as<br />

content <strong>of</strong> oxygen<br />

(sodium sulphate) (Gen. sing. -atis)<br />

2. With smaller<br />

Natrii sulfis<br />

-is<br />

content <strong>of</strong> oxygen<br />

(sodium sulphite) (Gen. sing. -itis)<br />

6


3. Salts <strong>of</strong><br />

oxygenless acids<br />

4. Salts <strong>of</strong><br />

oxygenless acids with<br />

organic base<br />

Natrii bromidum<br />

(sodium bromide)<br />

Morphini<br />

hydrochloridum<br />

(Morphine<br />

hydrochloride)<br />

-ǐdum<br />

(Gen. sing. -ǐdi)<br />

hydro-<br />

-id-um<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts are formed by adding the prefix sub- to the name<br />

<strong>of</strong> anion. E. g.: Magnesii subcarbonas – magnesium subcarbonate.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> organic salts <strong>of</strong> sodium and potassium consist <strong>of</strong> the name<br />

<strong>of</strong> base and <strong>of</strong> the added to it through the hyphen the name natrium, kalium in<br />

Nominativus. E. g.:<br />

Barbitalum-natrium – barbitalum-sodium;<br />

Benzylpenicillinum-kalium – benzylpenicillinum-potassium.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Translate into English:<br />

Argenti nitras; Kalii sulfus; Ferri oxydum; Magnesii peroxydum; acidum<br />

acetylsalicylicum; Natrii iodidum; Calcii phosphas; acidum hydrochloricum<br />

dilutum.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate into Latin:<br />

Diluted solution <strong>of</strong> hydrogen peroxide; ointment <strong>of</strong> copper nitrate; the tablets<br />

<strong>of</strong> nicotinic acid; codeine phosphate in tablets; the solution <strong>of</strong> calcium chloride.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

7


Test № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made up with the help<br />

<strong>of</strong> the suffix:<br />

a) -os-; b) -ic-; c) -ul-; d) -id-.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> hydracids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the component:<br />

a) hyper-; b) hyp(o)-; c) hydr(o)-; d) hygr(o)-.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Determine the names <strong>of</strong> anions:<br />

1) sulfas; 2) hydroiodidum; 3) mitris; 4) sulfidum; 5) arsenas; 6)<br />

hydrochloridum; 7) sulfis; 8) iodidum; 9) nitras; 10) hydrobromidum.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with larger content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />

b) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with smaller content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />

c) salts <strong>of</strong> hydracids;<br />

d) salts <strong>of</strong> hydracids with organic base.<br />

Test № 4.<br />

Determine the types <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds:<br />

1) acidum sulfuricum; 2) Argenti sulfas; 3) Hydrogenii peroxydum; 4)<br />

Hydrargyri cyanidum; 5) Calcii chloridum; 6) Benzylpenicillinum-natrium; 7)<br />

Aethylmorphini hydrochloridum; 8) Plumbi oxydum; 9) acidum hydrochloricum;<br />

10) Natrii benzoas.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) acids<br />

b) salts<br />

c) oxides<br />

8


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />

<strong>The</strong> pharmaceutical frequency cuts in the<br />

preparation names showing the chemical<br />

composition <strong>of</strong> the preparation, the frequency cuts<br />

<strong>of</strong> therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />

pharmacological character<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Most chemical elements which are used as medications have two names:<br />

1. Scientific (systemic) name, in which the composition and location <strong>of</strong><br />

components correspond to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a chemical compound’s<br />

molecule.<br />

2. Trivial (agreed) name, which does not reflect the systematic principles <strong>of</strong><br />

scientific classification, but is convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />

phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />

Trivial names can denote the chemical composition <strong>of</strong> a medication, the<br />

pharmacological group it belongs to, its therapeutic effect, etc. That’s why it is<br />

necessary to know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />

preparation and combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />

pharmacological meaning.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />

preparation.<br />

2. To know the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />

pharmacological meaning.<br />

3. To know how to distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal preparations.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Scientific (systemic)<br />

name<br />

2. Trivial (agreed) name<br />

<strong>The</strong> composition and location <strong>of</strong> components<br />

corresponding to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a<br />

chemical compound’s molecule.<br />

Convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />

phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What combining forms denote the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />

preparation?<br />

2. Name the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />

pharmacological meaning.<br />

3. Distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />

preparations.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

1. Underline the combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong> preparations, explain their<br />

meaning:<br />

Cytophosphan, Amidopyrinum, Oxytocinum, Phlogex, Neodorm,<br />

Barbamylum, Biloton, Apothyrin, Mycoseptol, Cholenzymum, Testoviron,<br />

Morphocyclinum, Oxytetracyclinum, Diiodthyrosinum, Pyraphenum, Hypnogen,<br />

Viperalginum, Pyopan, Allergol, Methylsulfazinum, Anastress, Aminocainum.<br />

4


<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Trivial names can denote the chemical composition <strong>of</strong> a medication, the<br />

pharmacological group it belongs to, its therapeutic effect, etc.<br />

Latin trivial names <strong>of</strong> drug preparations are the second declension neuter<br />

nouns with the ending –um in Nom. sing. As a rule, English equivalents <strong>of</strong> these<br />

names do not have the ending -um. Modern names <strong>of</strong> drug preparations do not<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten have the ending –um either. However, they are the second declension neuter<br />

nouns. In prescriptions they are written in Genetivus and have the ending –i which<br />

is added to the name in Nom. sing. E. g.:<br />

Nom. Hypnogen Allergol<br />

Gen. Hypnogeni Allergoli<br />

Combining forms which preserve their semantic meaning in the names <strong>of</strong><br />

drug preparations are also called pharmaceutical frequency parts (cuts) or termselements.<br />

Word-forming elements in the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal preparations<br />

№ Wordforminelement<br />

Meaning <strong>of</strong> term-<br />

Information about<br />

and its terms-elements Examples<br />

element origin<br />

1 2 3 4 5<br />

1. aesth- aesthesis (Greek)<br />

-feeling, sense<br />

anaesthetic<br />

Anaesthesinum<br />

2. aeth- ethyl,<br />

ethylene<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong><br />

ethyl, ethylene<br />

Aethazolum,<br />

Aethylmorphinum<br />

5


3. alg- algos (Greek),<br />

-pain<br />

anaesthetic<br />

action<br />

Analginum<br />

4. asthm- asthma (Greek),<br />

-asthma<br />

5. bil- bilis (Lat.)<br />

-gall, bile<br />

it is used in the<br />

names <strong>of</strong> the<br />

preparations <strong>of</strong> antiasthmatic<br />

group<br />

cholagogue<br />

Asthmatinum<br />

Bilitrastum<br />

6. card-<br />

cardia (Greek)<br />

cardiac remedy<br />

Cardiovalenum,<br />

cardi-<br />

-heart<br />

Corvalolum<br />

cor-<br />

cor (Lat.)<br />

-heart<br />

7. -cid caed- (Lat.)<br />

-to kill<br />

it kills a pathogenic<br />

organism<br />

Streptocidum<br />

8. chol- chole (Greek)<br />

-gall, bile<br />

cholagogue<br />

Chologonum<br />

9. cycl- cyclos (Greek)<br />

-circle<br />

antibiotic<br />

Cyclobarbitalum,<br />

Tetracyclinum<br />

6


10. glyc- glykys (Greek)<br />

-sweet<br />

toning up remedy<br />

Glycerinum,<br />

Glycerophosphas<br />

11. haem-<br />

haema (Greek)<br />

ctyptic,<br />

Haemostimulinum,<br />

(aem-)<br />

-blood<br />

stimulating,<br />

Haematogenum<br />

blood-forming<br />

12. hydr- hydor (Greek)<br />

water<br />

water<br />

Hydrogenium<br />

13. menth- mentha (Greek)<br />

-mint<br />

sedative<br />

Mentholum<br />

14. morph- morphe (Greek)<br />

-sleep<br />

anaesthetic<br />

Morphinum<br />

15. myc- myces (Greek) –<br />

fungus<br />

antibiotic<br />

Erythromycinum<br />

16. phen- phenol,<br />

phenyl<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong><br />

nitrogroup<br />

Phenobarbitalum<br />

7


17. suffixes<br />

nitrogen<br />

the presence <strong>of</strong><br />

Phthivazidum,<br />

-zid-<br />

nitrogroup<br />

Norsulfazolum<br />

-zin-<br />

-zol-<br />

18. pyr- pyr (Greek) –<br />

fever, fire<br />

febrifuge<br />

Amidopyrinum<br />

19. -cillinum antibiotic <strong>of</strong><br />

penicillin group<br />

preparations <strong>of</strong><br />

penicillin group<br />

Oxacillinum,<br />

Penicillinum<br />

20. -yl- hyle- (Greek) –<br />

substance<br />

substance <strong>of</strong> certain<br />

group<br />

aethylicus,<br />

salicylicus,<br />

methylicus<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Distinguish the word-forming elements, explain their meaning, translate the<br />

terms into English:<br />

Oxytetracyclini hydrochloridum, Phenoxymethylpenicillinum, Lincomycini<br />

hydrochloridum, Laevomycetinum, Bicillinum, Chlortetracyclinum,<br />

8


Benzylpenicillinum-kalium, Oxacillinum-natrium, Erythromycinum,<br />

Synthomycinum.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate into Latin:<br />

solution <strong>of</strong> amidopyrin, tetracycline ointment, liniment <strong>of</strong> synthomycin,<br />

solution <strong>of</strong> ethylmorphine hydrochloride, phenoxymethylpenicillin for suspension,<br />

oleandomycin phosphate in tablets, dragee <strong>of</strong> tetracycline with nistatin, pyridoxyn.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test.<br />

Find the corresponding meaning <strong>of</strong> the Latin combining forms:<br />

1) glyk- a) blood<br />

2) morph- b) circle<br />

3) aesth- c) fungus<br />

4) cycl- d) fever<br />

5) chol- e) pain<br />

6) haem- f) bile<br />

7) alg- g) sleep<br />

8) pyr- h) to kill<br />

9) myc- i) sweet<br />

10) cid- j) sense<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

9


Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”<br />

Botanical nomenclature. Biliarity. <strong>The</strong> use<br />

<strong>of</strong> botanical names in pharmacology. <strong>The</strong> plant<br />

names in the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal raw<br />

materials<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Medicinal plants are widely used in pharmacology. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />

herbs in botanical nomenclature are very <strong>of</strong>ten different from the plant names which<br />

are used in pharmaceutics, i. e. in the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal remedies.<br />

It is necessary to differentiate botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal plants, to understand binominal nomenclature, according to which each<br />

plant (and animal) has two names: generic and specific, in order to use them<br />

correctly in prescriptions.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know what botanical nomenclature is.<br />

2. To differentiate botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants.<br />

3. To know the difference between generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />

plants.<br />

4. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> some botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal plants in English.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Biology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Methods <strong>of</strong> classifying different kinds<br />

<strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />

generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> plants<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

3


Term<br />

Definition<br />

1. Generic name <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal plant<br />

2. Specific name <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal plant<br />

is expressed by a noun in Nominativus<br />

is expressed by an adjective or (seldom) by a noun<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What does botanical nomenclature include?<br />

2. How are botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants<br />

differentiated?<br />

3. What is the difference between generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />

plants?<br />

4. Name five patterns <strong>of</strong> binominal names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Translate the word combinations into Latin:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> seeds <strong>of</strong> wild mustard. 2. <strong>The</strong> juice <strong>of</strong> raspberry. 3. <strong>The</strong> flowers <strong>of</strong><br />

violet. 4. <strong>The</strong> herb <strong>of</strong> anise. 5. <strong>The</strong> leaves and roots <strong>of</strong> belladonna.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> history <strong>of</strong> biology and medicine goes back to antiquity. <strong>The</strong> Roman<br />

naturalist, writer and scientist Pliny the Elder (23-79 A.D.) systematized flora and<br />

fauna in his work “Naturalis historia” (“History <strong>of</strong> nature”). 9 out <strong>of</strong> 37 books<br />

4


included the problems <strong>of</strong> medicine, the description <strong>of</strong> medicinal herbs and drug<br />

preparations. This work is regarded as an encyclopedia <strong>of</strong> the ancient medical<br />

knowledge.<br />

During Renaissance the fundamentals <strong>of</strong> medical and biological terminology<br />

were formed. Soon this terminology became international.<br />

In XVII-XVIII centuries there were a lot <strong>of</strong> botanical terms derived from<br />

Greek and Latin words. It was necessary to find new methods <strong>of</strong> classifying<br />

different kinds <strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> Swedish scientist Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778)<br />

introduced binominal nomenclature, according to which each plant (and animal)<br />

had two names: generic and specific. A generic name is a noun in Nom. and a<br />

specific name is usually an adjective or (seldom) a noun. Depending on how a<br />

specific name is expressed there are five patterns <strong>of</strong> binominal names:<br />

1. A noun in Nom. + a noun in Nom.: Artemisia absinthium (common<br />

wormwood).<br />

2. A noun in Nom. + a noun in Gen.: Primula veris (primrose).<br />

3. A noun in Nom. + a noun that cannot be declined: <strong>The</strong>obroma cacao<br />

(cocoa-tree).<br />

4. A noun in Nom. + a noun with an attribute: Arctostaphylos uva – ursi<br />

(bear berry).<br />

5. A noun in Nom. + an adjective: Crataegus oxyacantha (hawthorn).<br />

In the nomenclature <strong>of</strong> drug preparations the plants usually have only one<br />

name: generic or specific.<br />

If the botanical name corresponds to the first, third or fourth pattern, the<br />

name <strong>of</strong> medicinal substance (that is the pharmaceutical name <strong>of</strong> the plant) is as a<br />

rule a specific name. If the botanical name corresponds to the second or the fifth<br />

pattern, the name <strong>of</strong> medicinal substance is a generic name. E. g.:<br />

Pattern Botanical name Pharmaceutical name<br />

Pattern 1 Atropa belladonna Belladonna (deadly nightshade)<br />

5


Pattern 3<br />

Pattern 4<br />

Pattern 2<br />

Pattern5<br />

<strong>The</strong>obroma cacao<br />

Dryopteris filix-mas<br />

Primula veris<br />

Hypericum perforatum<br />

Cacao (cocoa-tree)<br />

Filix mas (male fern)<br />

Primula (primrose)<br />

Hypericum (Saint-John’s-wort)<br />

g.:<br />

However, sometimes botanical and pharmaceutical names are the same. E.<br />

Botanical name Pharmaceutical name Meaning<br />

Adonis vernalis<br />

Anisum vulgare<br />

Helichrysum arenarium<br />

Ledum palustre<br />

Polygonum hydropiper<br />

Rhamnus cathartica<br />

Rubus idaeus<br />

Viola tricolor<br />

Adonis vernalis<br />

Anisum vulgare<br />

Helichrysum arenarium<br />

Ledum palustre<br />

Polygonum hydropiper<br />

Rhamnus cathartica<br />

Rubus idaeus<br />

Viola tricolor<br />

pheasant’s eye<br />

anise<br />

everlasting<br />

Labrador-tea<br />

water pepper<br />

purging buckthorn<br />

raspberry<br />

violet<br />

Some pharmaceutical names are completely different from the botanical<br />

names <strong>of</strong> plants. However, they are very few.<br />

Botanical name Pharmaceutical name English name<br />

Brassica nigra<br />

Cassia acutifolia<br />

(Cassia angustifolia)<br />

Sinapis<br />

Senna<br />

Black mustard<br />

Senna<br />

6


Sometimes the same plant can have two botanical names, which were<br />

given by the same or different naturalists in different epochs. E. g.:<br />

Brassica nigra or Sinapis nigra<br />

Cassia acutifolia or Senna alexandrina<br />

In such cases the pharmaceutical names are derived from the botanical names<br />

<strong>of</strong> plants which were used in the later period.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Translate into English:<br />

1. Gemmae Betulae. 2. Baccae Rubi idaei. 3. Secale cornutum. 4. Herba<br />

Plantaginis. 5. Flores Calendulae. 6. Cortex Quercus. 7. Folia Cerasi.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Translate into Latin:<br />

1. Flowers <strong>of</strong> hawthorn. 2. Berries <strong>of</strong> elder. 3. Lily <strong>of</strong> the valley. 4. Nettle<br />

herb. 5. Crataegus root. 6. Sunflower oil emulsion. 7. Mint water.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin names:<br />

1) Chelidonium; 2) Absinthium; 3) Digitalis; 4) Chamomilla; 5) Glycyrrhiza; 6)<br />

Mentha piperita; 7) Foeniculum; 8) Filix mas; 9) Hypericum; 10) Urtica.<br />

7


Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) liquorice f) wormwood<br />

b) celadine g) pepper-mint<br />

c) St. John’s wort h) foxglove<br />

d) male fern i) camomile<br />

e) nettle j) fennel<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ names:<br />

1. a) tinctura Crataegi ; 2. a) extractum Polygoni hydropiperis<br />

fluidum;<br />

b) tincturas Crataegi ; b) extracti Polygoni hydropiperis fluidi;<br />

c) tincturae Crataegi; c) extracto Polygoni hydropiperis fluido;<br />

3. a) pulveris radicis Frangulae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />

b) pulveres radicis Frangulae; b) aquae Menthae;<br />

c) pulvis radix Frangula; c) aquam Menthae.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

8


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

<strong>The</strong> prescription, its grammatical structure,<br />

the patterns <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing. <strong>The</strong> structure<br />

<strong>of</strong> a prescription. <strong>The</strong> grammatical structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

prescription phrase. <strong>The</strong> rules <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting.<br />

<strong>The</strong> detailed and brief samples <strong>of</strong><br />

prescription-writing.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a pharmaceutical chemist with the<br />

instructions in medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient. Prescription is an<br />

important document, it should be written by a special form, without any corrections.<br />

While mastering the topic the student must know the structure <strong>of</strong> the<br />

prescription and the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know the definition <strong>of</strong> a prescription.<br />

2) To know the structure <strong>of</strong> the prescription.<br />

3) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />

4) To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Prescription<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />

pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />

medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What is a prescription?<br />

2. How many parts does a prescription consist <strong>of</strong>? Characterize each <strong>of</strong> them.<br />

3. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing?<br />

4. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Read the prescriptions, re-write them into the copy-book, write every word in<br />

the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into English:<br />

3


1) Recipe: Sulfuris depurati 2,0<br />

Glycerini<br />

Spiritus camphorati āā 5,0<br />

Aquae destillatae 60 ml<br />

Misce. Da. Signa<br />

2) Recipe: Anaesthesini<br />

Zinci oxydi<br />

Glycerini ana 10,0<br />

Aquae Plumbi ad 100 ml<br />

Misce. Da. Signa<br />

3) Recipe: Natrii tetraboratis<br />

Natrii hydrocarbonatis āā 20,0<br />

Natrii chloridi 10,0<br />

Olei Menthae guttas III<br />

Misce, ut fiat pulvis.<br />

Da. Signa<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a pharmaceutical chemist with the<br />

instructions in medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient. Prescription is an<br />

important document, it should be written by a special form, without any corrections.<br />

A prescription consists <strong>of</strong> such parts:<br />

<strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> a prescription<br />

1. Inscriptio (inscription), which includes the name <strong>of</strong> a medical<br />

<strong>establishment</strong>, its address, code and telephone number.<br />

2. Datum – the date <strong>of</strong> prescription – writing (day, month, year).<br />

3. Nomen et aetas aegroti – a patient’s name and age.<br />

4. Nomen medici – a doctor’s name.<br />

5. Invocatio, or ordinatio – the doctor’s address “Recipe” which means<br />

“Take”.<br />

6. Designatio materiarum – the enumeration <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances <strong>of</strong><br />

which the medicine consists.<br />

<strong>The</strong> prescription is called simple, if only one substance is written in it. If<br />

there are several substances in the prescription, it is called a compound one. In the<br />

compound prescription the names <strong>of</strong> preparations are written in certain order:<br />

1) Basis (a basic remedy) – the substance with which a doctor is<br />

going to treat a patient;<br />

4


2) remedium adjuvans (an auxiliary remedy) – the substance<br />

which intensifies or weakens the basic remedy’s effect;<br />

3) remedium corrigens (a correcting remedy) – the substance<br />

which improves a medicine’s taste and smell;<br />

4) remedium constituens (a form-making remedy) – the<br />

substance which gives a final form to a medicine.<br />

It is natural that the compound prescription may not contain all these<br />

ingredients. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> toxic and narcotic remedies are always written in the<br />

beginning <strong>of</strong> the ingredients’ list.<br />

7. Subscriptio (subscription) – is the instruction to a pharmaceutical chemist<br />

about the following:<br />

a) what is necessary to do with the substances (to mix, to<br />

sterilize etc.);<br />

b) what form the medicine should have (tablets, powder,<br />

ointment, suppository etc.);<br />

c) how many doses should be given to a patient;<br />

d) in what packing (in the waxed or paraffined paper, in the<br />

dark glass etc.).<br />

8. Signatura (designation). In this part after the verb “Signa” or “Signetur”<br />

the rules <strong>of</strong> using the medicine are given in that language which a patient<br />

can understand.<br />

9. Nomen medici et sigillum personale – the doctor’s signature and personal<br />

seal.<br />

<strong>The</strong> rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing<br />

1. Nothing should be written under the word “Recipe”.<br />

2. All the names <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances are written in column, one<br />

under another.<br />

3. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the medicinal substances are written in the genitive case<br />

(Gen.).<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> first word in the prescription line is always written with a capital<br />

letter.<br />

5. If the name <strong>of</strong> one medicinal substance (when it consists <strong>of</strong> several words)<br />

doesn’t go into one line, it should be carried over to the next line, a little<br />

way away from the beginning <strong>of</strong> the line.<br />

6. In the middle <strong>of</strong> the prescription line we should write with a capital letter:<br />

a) the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal plants;<br />

b) the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal preparations;<br />

c) the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements;<br />

d) the names <strong>of</strong> cations in salts and oxides.<br />

7. We should write with a small letter in the middle <strong>of</strong> the prescription line:<br />

5


a) the names <strong>of</strong> plants’ parts (root, leaves, flowers etc.);<br />

b) adjectives and participles;<br />

c) the names <strong>of</strong> anions in salts and oxides.<br />

8. <strong>The</strong> quantity <strong>of</strong> medicinal substances is written to the right <strong>of</strong> them:<br />

a) the quantity <strong>of</strong> solid and dry substances is given in grammes and<br />

parts <strong>of</strong> a gramme. <strong>The</strong> words “gramme”, “decigramme”,<br />

“centigramme”, “milligramme” are not written in preseriptions, and<br />

the quantity is written by arabic numerals in a shape <strong>of</strong> decimal<br />

fractions, e. g.: 1,0 – one gramme; 0,3 – three decigrammes; 0,05 –<br />

five centigrammes etc.;<br />

b) the quantity <strong>of</strong> liquid substances is given in millilitres. E. g.: 100<br />

ml. If the quantity <strong>of</strong> a liquid is smaller than 1 ml, it is measured in<br />

drops. <strong>The</strong> quantity <strong>of</strong> drops is given by roman numerals, before<br />

which they write the word “drop” or “drops” in Acc. (the Latin).<br />

E. g.: guttam I – (take) one drop;<br />

guttas II – (take) two drops etc.<br />

c) there are substances which are measured out by units <strong>of</strong> action<br />

(UA). E. g.: 500 000 UA.<br />

9. If two or more substances are prescribed in equal quantities, they are<br />

written one under another and near the last one the word “ana” (āā) is put<br />

which means “equally”. E. g.:<br />

Recipe: Tincturae Belladonnae<br />

Tincturae Convallariae<br />

Tincturae Menthae āā 50 ml<br />

Misce. Da. Signa.<br />

10. It is allowed to write two prescriptions on one form. <strong>The</strong>y are separated<br />

from each other by such sign: #<br />

11. While prescribing some medicinal forms (pastes, suppositories) the<br />

quantity <strong>of</strong> a form-making substance may not be indicated. <strong>The</strong>n a<br />

pharmaceutical chemist may take as much as it is necessary (quantum<br />

satis).<br />

<strong>The</strong> additional inscriptions in prescriptions<br />

1. When a medicine is needed urgently, a doctor writes at the top <strong>of</strong> the<br />

prescription the words “Cito!” (quickly) or “Statim!” (immediately).<br />

2. If a doctor prescribes some medicine for himself, he writes in the<br />

prescription after the word “Signa” (or “Signetur”): “pro me” (for me) or<br />

“pro auctore” (for the author).<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

6


Task.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Take: Of calcium chloride 10,0<br />

Of the distilled water 200 ml<br />

Mix. Give. Label.<br />

2. Take: Of castor oil 1,0<br />

Give such doses number 15 in gelatinous capsules<br />

Label.<br />

3. Take: Of silver nitrate<br />

Of the precipitated sulphur equally 1,5<br />

Of ethyl alcohol 96%<br />

Of glycerine equally 25 ml<br />

Of the distilled water 200 ml<br />

Mix. Give in the dark glass.<br />

Label.<br />

4. Take: Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the pepper-mint 4 ml<br />

Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the wormwood 6 ml<br />

Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> the valerian 8 ml<br />

Mix. Give. Label.<br />

5. Take: Of mercury salicylate<br />

Of the peach oil up to 180 ml<br />

Mix. Sterilize. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ name:<br />

1. a) spiritus aethylicus; 2. a) sulfur praecipitatum;<br />

b) spiritus aethylici; b) sulfuri praecipitato;<br />

c) spiritum aethylicum; c) sulfuris praecipitati;<br />

3. a) solutionis Iodi spirituosae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />

b) solutio Iodi spirituosa; b) aquae Menthae;<br />

7


c) solutiones Iodi spirituosae; c) aquam Menthae;<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Insert the omitted verb in the prescription:<br />

Recipe: Synthomycini 0,2<br />

Butyri Cacao 3,0<br />

Misce, ut … suppositorium rectale<br />

Signa.<br />

a) fiunt<br />

b) fiant<br />

c) fit<br />

d) fiat<br />

e) fias<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

8


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

Latin nomenclature <strong>of</strong> medicinal forms. <strong>The</strong><br />

additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Medicinal substances are such substances which are able in the certain<br />

quantity to remove the pathological process or to stand in the way <strong>of</strong> its<br />

development. <strong>The</strong>y are contained by raw materials. <strong>The</strong> products <strong>of</strong> medicinal raw<br />

materials which are formed by the way <strong>of</strong> purification from the ballast substances or<br />

with the help <strong>of</strong> chemical synthesis are called medicinal preparations. According to<br />

the degree <strong>of</strong> purification from the ballast substances the medicinal preparations are<br />

subdivided into simple and compound ones. Depending on the using <strong>of</strong> the<br />

constituent substances the medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t<br />

ones. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing the medicinal substances in prescriptions are the<br />

important aspect <strong>of</strong> the topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Gen. sing. <strong>of</strong><br />

the medicinal preparations is formed.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To receive a common view <strong>of</strong> medicinal forms and to get acquainted with<br />

the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing them out:<br />

spelling;<br />

a) to learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics;<br />

b) to master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each medicinal form, their<br />

c) to learn to correctly write out solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />

d) to correctly use the verb forms <strong>of</strong> imperative and subjunctive moods which<br />

are used in prescriptions.<br />

2. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

3


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Prescription<br />

Dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications<br />

Solid, liquid, s<strong>of</strong>t<br />

Dosage routes:<br />

- enteral<br />

- parenteral<br />

Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />

pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />

medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />

Final products administered to the patient.<br />

All the medications divided according to the<br />

consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients.<br />

Means <strong>of</strong> access to the site <strong>of</strong> action or systemic<br />

circulation:<br />

- through the alimentary canal;<br />

- not through the alimentary canal, but rather by<br />

injection.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />

ingredients?<br />

2. Into what groups are dosage routes divided?<br />

3. What medicinal forms belong to solid ones?<br />

4. What medicinal forms belong to liquid ones?<br />

5. What medicinal forms belong to s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />

6. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each medicinal form.<br />

7. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />

4


4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Take: Of the flowers <strong>of</strong> camomile<br />

Of the fruits <strong>of</strong> fennel equally 10,0<br />

Of the root <strong>of</strong> liquorice<br />

Of the leaves <strong>of</strong> pepper-mint equally 20,0<br />

Mix, let the herbal collection forms.<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

#<br />

2. Take: Of the aloe syrup with iron 100 ml<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

#<br />

3. Take: Of codeine phosphate 0,15<br />

Of phenobarbital 1,0<br />

Of potassium bromide<br />

Of sodium bromide equally 7,0<br />

Of sodium nitrate 1,0<br />

Of the distilled water up to 300 ml<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

#<br />

5


4. Take: Of the spirituous solution <strong>of</strong> iodine 5% 2 ml<br />

Of tannin 3,0<br />

Of glycerine 10 ml<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

#<br />

5. Take: Of white streptocide 5,0<br />

Of penicillin 200000 UA<br />

Mix, let the finest powder forms.<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

#<br />

6. Take: Of hydrocortisone ointment 1% 10,0<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Final products administered to the patient are called dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications.<br />

According to the consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients all the medications are divided<br />

into solid (formae medicamentorum durae), liquid (formae medicamentorum<br />

fluidae), s<strong>of</strong>t (formae medicamentorum molles).<br />

6


Medications used for injections (formae medicamentorum pro injectionibus),<br />

for eye diseases (formae medicamentorum pro oculis), for infants and children<br />

under 3 years old (formae medicamentorum pro infantibus) form separate groups.<br />

Dosage routes (i. e. means <strong>of</strong> access to the site <strong>of</strong> action or systemic<br />

circulation) are divided into two groups: enteral (enterales) – through the alimentary<br />

canal; parenteral (parenterales) – not through the alimentary canal, but rather by<br />

injection through some other route, as subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraorbital,<br />

intracapsular, intraspinal, intrasternal, intravenous, etc.<br />

Solid medicinal forms<br />

pulveres (pulvis, ĕris m) – powders<br />

aspersiones (aspersio, onis f) – aspersions<br />

capsulae (capsula, ae f) – capsules<br />

tabulettae (tabuletta, ae f) – tablets<br />

pilulae (pilula, ae f) – pills<br />

glossettae (glossetta, ae f) – glossets<br />

granulae (granula, ae f) – granules<br />

dragée (indeclinable) – caramels<br />

species (species, ei f) – herbal collection<br />

charta sinapisata – mustard-poultice<br />

pulveres dentifrici – tooth-powders<br />

suppositoria (suppositorium, i n) – suppositories<br />

Liquid medicinal forms<br />

solutiones (solutio, onis f) – solutions<br />

guttae (gutta, ae f) – drops<br />

tincturae (tinctura, ae f) – tinctures<br />

extracta (extractum, i n) – extracts<br />

infusa et decocta (infusum, i n; decoctum, i n) – infusions and decoctions<br />

7


emulsa (emulsum, i n) – emulsions<br />

suspensiones (suspensio, onis f) – suspensions<br />

mixturae (mixtura, ae f) – mixtures<br />

mucilagines (mucilago, inis f) – mucilages<br />

sirupi (sirupus, i m) – syrups<br />

S<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms<br />

unguenta (unguentum, i n) – ointments<br />

linimenta (linimentum, i n) – liniments<br />

pastae stomatalogicae – stomatalogic pastes<br />

pastae dentales – toothpastes<br />

<strong>The</strong> additional inscriptions in prescriptions<br />

1. When a medicine is needed urgently, a doctor writes at the top <strong>of</strong> the<br />

prescription the words “Cito!” (quickly) or “Statim!” (immediately).<br />

2. If a doctor prescribes some medicine for himself, he writes in the<br />

prescription after the word “Signa” (or “Signetur”): “pro me” (for me) or<br />

“pro auctore” (for the author).<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Take: Of ichthyol 10,0<br />

8


Of salicylic acid 5,0<br />

Of turpentine 10,0<br />

Of lanolin 100,0<br />

Mix, let ointment forms.<br />

Give. Label.<br />

2. Take: Of the dense extract <strong>of</strong> male fern 6,0<br />

Divide into 6 equal parts.<br />

Give in gelatinous capsules.<br />

Label.<br />

3. Take: Of the infusion <strong>of</strong> senna leaves 10,0 – 150 ml<br />

Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> mint 1 ml<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

4. Take: Of the fluid extract <strong>of</strong> nettle<br />

Of the fluid extract <strong>of</strong> wormwood equally 25 ml<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

9


Choose the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />

Variant 1 Variant 2<br />

1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />

2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />

3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />

4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />

5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />

6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />

7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />

Test № 2.<br />

I. Suspension belongs to:<br />

1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />

2) solid medicinal forms;<br />

3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />

II. Mustard-poultice belongs to:<br />

1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />

2) solid medicinal forms;<br />

3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Choose the lines in which there are only liquid medicinal forms:<br />

1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />

2) infusum, linimentum;<br />

3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />

4) solutio, species;<br />

5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />

10


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> solid medicinal<br />

forms.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. Solid<br />

forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

out the solid medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the solid forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications is formed.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />

2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each solid medicinal form,<br />

their spelling.<br />

3. To learn to correctly write out solid medicinal forms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Powder<br />

Aspersion<br />

A substance made up <strong>of</strong> an aggregation <strong>of</strong> small<br />

particles, as that obtained by the grinding or<br />

trituration <strong>of</strong> a solid drug.<br />

3


Capsule<br />

Tablet<br />

Pill<br />

Glosset<br />

Granule<br />

Caramel<br />

Species<br />

Mustard-poultice<br />

Tooth-powder<br />

Suppository<br />

<strong>The</strong> most frequently used form <strong>of</strong> undivided powder<br />

which is prescribed for external use.<br />

A structure in which something is enclosed.<br />

A solid dosage form, which contains a medicinal<br />

substance in pure or diluted form.<br />

A dosage form for internal use.<br />

(Greek glossa – tongue) A small tablet prescribed for<br />

using under the tongue.<br />

A small pill made from sucrose; its mass is<br />

approximately 0,05.<br />

A sugar-coated pill or medicated confection.<br />

A mixture <strong>of</strong> some dried medicinal herbs or their<br />

parts which is used to prepare drug preparations.<br />

A sheet <strong>of</strong> paper coated with a thin layer <strong>of</strong> mustard<br />

powder.<br />

A white color powder the basic component <strong>of</strong> which<br />

is calcium carbonate.<br />

A medicated mass adapted for introduction into the<br />

rectal, vaginal, or urethral orifice <strong>of</strong> the body.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />

ingredients?<br />

2. What medicinal forms belong to solid ones?<br />

3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each solid medicinal form.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

4


Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Take: Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> St. John’s wort 10,0<br />

Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> valerian 20,0<br />

Of the tincture <strong>of</strong> celadine 10,0<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

2. Take: Of naphthalane 40,0<br />

Of the precipitated sulphur<br />

Of tar equally 15,0<br />

Of the green soap 30,0<br />

Mix, let ointment forms.<br />

Give. Label.<br />

3. Take: <strong>The</strong> tablets <strong>of</strong> raunatin 0,002 number 100<br />

Give. Label.<br />

4. Take: Of the extract <strong>of</strong> belladonna 0,01<br />

Of the magnesium oxide<br />

Of the sodium hydrocarbonate equally 0,3<br />

Mix, let a powder forms.<br />

Give such doses number 12.<br />

Label.<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Solid medicinal forms<br />

(Formae medicamentorum durae)<br />

pulveres (pulvis, ĕris m) – powders<br />

aspersiones (aspersio, onis f) – aspersions<br />

capsulae (capsula, ae f) – capsules<br />

tabulettae (tabuletta, ae f) – tablets<br />

pilulae (pilula, ae f) – pills<br />

glossettae (glossetta, ae f) – glossets<br />

granulae (granula, ae, f) – granules<br />

dragée (indeclinable) – caramels<br />

species (species, ei f) – species, herbal collection<br />

charta sinapisata – mustard-poultice<br />

pulveres dentifrici – tooth-powders<br />

suppositoria (suppositorium, i n) – suppositories<br />

Powders – pulveres<br />

Powder is a substance made up <strong>of</strong> an aggregation <strong>of</strong> small particles, as that<br />

obtained by the grinding or trituration <strong>of</strong> a solid drug.<br />

According to the number <strong>of</strong> ingredients the powders are divided into simple<br />

powders (pulveres simplices) and compound powders (pulveres compositi).<br />

According to the way <strong>of</strong> use:<br />

- pulveres ad usum externum (pro usu externo) – for external use;<br />

- pulveres ad usum internum (pro usu interno) – for internal use.<br />

According to the dosage:<br />

- pulveres divisi – divided powders;<br />

- pulveres indivisi – undivided powders.<br />

6


According to the way <strong>of</strong> administration:<br />

- pulveres pro dosi – powders to be taken only once;<br />

- pulveres pro die – powders for one day, daily dose.<br />

Powders are taken:<br />

- per os – by mouth;<br />

- per aspersionem – by aspersion;<br />

- per insufflationem – by insufflation;<br />

- per injectionem – by injection;<br />

- per rectum – through rectum;<br />

- per gargarisma – through gargling.<br />

Powders are given:<br />

- in capsulis operculatis – in coated capsules;<br />

- in capsulis chartaceis – in paper capsules;<br />

- in charta cerata – in waxed paper;<br />

- in charta paraffinata – in paraffin paper;<br />

- in charta pergaminata – in parchment paper.<br />

You should write: “Misce, ut fiat pulvis” in Subscriptio when prescribing<br />

compound powders.<br />

Aspersions – aspersiones<br />

Aspersion is the most frequently used form <strong>of</strong> undivided powder. It is<br />

prescribed for external use.<br />

When aspersions are prescribed, the therapeutic concentration <strong>of</strong> a medicinal<br />

substance is considered to be the basic value. Starch or talc are used as filters.<br />

Capsules – capsulae<br />

Capsule is a structure in which something is enclosed, such as a hard or a<br />

s<strong>of</strong>t, soluble container <strong>of</strong> a suitable substance, for enclosing a dose <strong>of</strong> medication,<br />

usually <strong>of</strong> that medication which has bad taste, smell or can affect mucous<br />

7


membrane <strong>of</strong> the oral cavity and teeth. It dissolves quickly in stomach or small<br />

intestine.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are:<br />

- capsulae (gelatinosae) durae operculatae – solid (gelatinous) capsules with<br />

a lid;<br />

- capsulae (gelatinosae) molles – semisolid (gelatinous) capsules;<br />

- perlae gelatinosae – gelatinous pearls, or capsules which have oval form<br />

and the form <strong>of</strong> balls;<br />

- perlettae – capsules which are implanted subcutaneously by means <strong>of</strong><br />

surgery;<br />

- capsulae rectales – rectal capsules, or capsules which are inserted through<br />

rectum (per rectum).<br />

When prescribing drugs in gelatinous capsules, it is necessary to indicate the<br />

kind <strong>of</strong> capsules in Subscriptio as different capsules deliver medications to different<br />

parts <strong>of</strong> alimentary canal.<br />

Tablets – tabulettae<br />

Tablet is a solid dosage form, <strong>of</strong> varying weight, size, and shape, which may<br />

be moulded or compressed, and which contains a medicinal substance in pure or<br />

diluted form.<br />

According to the way <strong>of</strong> preparing the tablets are divided into:<br />

1. Oriblettae or tabulettae per os, tabulettae perorales – peroral tablets.<br />

2. Resoriblettae or tabulettae sub linguam, tabulettae sublinguales –<br />

sublingual tablets.<br />

3. Injectabulettae or tabulettae pro injectionibus – tablets for injectable<br />

solutions.<br />

4. Implantabulettae or tabulettae pro implantatione, tabulettae implantatae –<br />

tablets prepared in aseptic conditions for implantation.<br />

5. Solublettae or tabulettae pro gargarismatis, pro perlotionibus – tablets<br />

used to prepare solutions for gargling and irrigation.<br />

8


A lot <strong>of</strong> drug preparations are administered in enteric-coated tablets.<br />

Tablets are prescribed in two ways:<br />

1. When tablets do not have a code name, the names <strong>of</strong> their ingredients and<br />

doses are indicated. <strong>The</strong> amount and dosage form are indicated in<br />

Subscriptio.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> ingredients are not indicated when combined tablets (which have a<br />

code name) are prescribed.<br />

<strong>The</strong> weight <strong>of</strong> a tablet is not indicated only if the weight <strong>of</strong> an ingredient is<br />

fixed (standard).<br />

Pills – pilulae<br />

Pill is a dosage form for internal use. Pills have the form <strong>of</strong> balls with the<br />

mass <strong>of</strong> 0,1 to 0,5, prepared <strong>of</strong> the mass <strong>of</strong> pills. <strong>The</strong> pills with the mass more than<br />

0,5 are called boli (bolus, i m).<br />

<strong>The</strong> formula <strong>of</strong> prescribing the pills: Misce, ut fiant pilulae numero … (Mix<br />

to get the pills number …).<br />

Glossets – glossettae<br />

Glossets are small tablets prescribed for using under the tongue. <strong>The</strong> name<br />

“glossetta” is derived from Greek glossa – tongue.<br />

Granules – granula<br />

Granule is a small pill made from sucrose; its mass is approximately 0,05.<br />

Granules usually contain medicinal and additional substances (sugar, starch,<br />

talc, cocoa, chocolate, etc.).<br />

Granules are usually prescribed in a short form, as they are made at the<br />

pharmaceutical factories. <strong>The</strong>ir total amount is usually indicated.<br />

Caramels – dragee<br />

9


Caramel is a sugar-coated pill, or medicated confection. Vitamins are usually<br />

prescribed in the form <strong>of</strong> caramel. Caramels are prescribed in two ways:<br />

Rp.: Aminazini 0,025 Rp.: Dragee Aminazini 0,025 N 12<br />

D.t.d. N 12 in dragee<br />

D.S.: 1 dragee twice a day<br />

S.: 1 dragee twice a day<br />

Species – species<br />

Species is the mixture <strong>of</strong> some dried medicinal herbs or their parts (flowers,<br />

leaves, berries, roots, rootstock, etc.) which is used to prepare drug preparations.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are such groups <strong>of</strong> species:<br />

1. Species ad infusa et de cocta – species for infusions and decoctions.<br />

2. Species fumales – species for smoking.<br />

3. Species pro balneis – species for having a bath.<br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>of</strong>ficinal species (prepared at the pharmaceutical factories) are prescribed<br />

in a short form whereas the magistral species (prepared in a pharmacy according to<br />

the physician’s prescription) are prescribed in a more detailed form.<br />

Mustard-poultice – charta sinapisata<br />

Mustard-poultice is a sheet <strong>of</strong> paper coated with a thin layer <strong>of</strong> the powder <strong>of</strong><br />

the skimmed mustard seeds. This <strong>of</strong>ficinal form is prescribed in a short form.<br />

Tooth-powders – pulveres dentifrici<br />

Tooth-powder is a powder <strong>of</strong> white color, the basic component <strong>of</strong> which is<br />

calcium carbonate. To get the finest chalk powder the method <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />

precipitation is used.<br />

10


Besides the precipitated calcium carbonate tooth-powders include essential<br />

oils (mint oil, oil <strong>of</strong> cloves, eucalyptus oil, anis oil), which impart pleasant smell<br />

and deodorant properties to them.<br />

Tooth-powders are divided into hygienic and medical preventive ones.<br />

Suppositories - suppositoria<br />

Suppository is a medicated mass adapted for introduction into the rectal,<br />

vaginal, or urethral orifice <strong>of</strong> the body; suppository bases are solid at room<br />

temperature but melt or dissolve at body temperature. Common bases for<br />

suppositories are: butyrum Cacao (cocoa butter), olea vegetabilia (vegetable oils),<br />

mixtura cum cera (cerated mixture), Lanolinum (lanolin).<br />

Other bases include glycerinated gelatine, hydrogenated vegetable oils,<br />

polyethylene glycols <strong>of</strong> various molecular weights, and fatty acid esters <strong>of</strong><br />

polyethylene glycol. <strong>The</strong> suppositories which are inserted through rectum are called<br />

suppositoria rectalia (rectal suppositories) and those which are inserted through<br />

vagina are called suppositoria vaginalia (vaginal suppositories). According to the<br />

form vaginal suppositories are divided into globuli (globules), bacilli (medicated<br />

bacilli), pessaria (pessaries). Suppositories are prescribed in a full or short form. If<br />

suppositories have a code name, the word Recipe is followed by the word<br />

Suppositoria and the name.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

Latin, memorize the spelling:<br />

Take: 10 tablets <strong>of</strong> furacin for external use.<br />

Give. Label: Dissolve 2 tablets in one glass <strong>of</strong> water.<br />

Use to gargle throat.<br />

11


Take: Analgin 0,25<br />

Amidopyrin 0,25<br />

Mix, let there be made some powder.<br />

Give 12 such doses.<br />

Label: one powder 3 times a day.<br />

Take: Reduced iron 1,0<br />

Give 15 such doses in gelatinous capsules.<br />

Label: 2 capsules 3 times a day after meals.<br />

Take: Antiasthmatic species 50.0<br />

Give in a sac.<br />

Label.<br />

Take: Dragee “Revitum”<br />

Give 100 such doses.<br />

Label: one dragee 3 times a day.<br />

Take: Leaves <strong>of</strong> peppermint 40,0<br />

Flowers <strong>of</strong> matricary 40,0<br />

Flovers <strong>of</strong> clover 20,0<br />

Milfoil 20,0<br />

Mix, let there be made some species.<br />

Give.<br />

Label: boil one tablespoon <strong>of</strong> mixture in 0,5 glass <strong>of</strong> water.<br />

Take 3 times a day.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

12


Test № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> maximum mass <strong>of</strong> the tablet “ad usum internum” must not be more than:<br />

a) 0,5 b) 1,0 c) 0,1<br />

Test № 2.<br />

tea”:<br />

Choose the pharmaceutical term corresponding to the English one “sedative<br />

a) species diaphoreticae;<br />

b) species nervinae;<br />

c) species antiasthmaticae;<br />

d) species cholagogae;<br />

e) species carminative<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Choose the lines in which there are only solid medicinal forms:<br />

1) suspensio, tinctura;<br />

2) pulvis, granulum;<br />

3) emulsum, dragee;<br />

4) solutio, linimentum;<br />

5) sirupus, mucilago<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

13


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal<br />

forms.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. S<strong>of</strong>t<br />

forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

out the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the s<strong>of</strong>t forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications is formed.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />

2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal form,<br />

their spelling.<br />

3. To learn to correctly write out s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Ointment<br />

Liniment<br />

A semisolid preparation for external application to<br />

the body, usually containing a medicinal substance<br />

and a special base.<br />

3


Paste<br />

A liquid ointment which looks like homogeneous<br />

mucilaginous mass or dense liquid which melts<br />

under the body temperature.<br />

A semisolid preparation, generally for external use,<br />

<strong>of</strong> a fatty base, a viscous or mucilaginous base, or a<br />

mixture <strong>of</strong> starch and petrolatum.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />

ingredients?<br />

2. What medicinal forms belong to s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />

3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal form.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

English, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Rp.: Unguenti Furacillini 1,0% 25,0<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: lubricate the affected skin regions.<br />

2. Rp.: Ichthyoli 4,0<br />

Zinci oxydi<br />

Amyli ana 10,0<br />

Lanolini 80,0<br />

Misce, fiat pasta.<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: zinc paste.<br />

4


3. Rp.: Acidi salicylici 1,0<br />

Hydrargyri amidochloridi<br />

Bismuthi subnitratis аnа 3,0<br />

Vaselini<br />

Lanolini ana 15,0<br />

Misce, fiat unguentum<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: ointment to геmоvе freckles.<br />

4. Rp.: Natrii fluoratis<br />

Bolus albae аnа 1,0<br />

Glycerini 1,2<br />

Misce, fiat pasta<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: to embrocate the paste into the sensitive<br />

dentine fог 2-3 months.<br />

5. Rp.: Extracti Belladonnae 0,015<br />

Novocaini 0,2<br />

Xer<strong>of</strong>ormii 0,1<br />

Ichthyoli 0,2<br />

Butyri Сасао quantum satis, ut fiat suppositorium rectale<br />

Da tales doses numero 20.<br />

Signa: оnе suppository 2 times а day.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

S<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms<br />

(Formae medicamentorum molles)<br />

unguenta (unguentum, i n) – ointments<br />

linimenta (linimentum, i n) – liniments<br />

5


pastae stomatalogicae – stomatologic pastes<br />

pastae dentales – toothpastes<br />

Ointments – unguenta<br />

Ointment is a semisolid preparation for external application to the body,<br />

usually containing a medicinal substance and a special base. Vaselinum – vaseline,<br />

Lanolinum – lanolin, adeps suillus depuratus (or axungia porcina) – depurated<br />

pork lard are common bases for an ointment.<br />

Eye ointments are called: oculenta or unguenta ophthalmica or unguenta<br />

pro oculis.<br />

<strong>The</strong> prescriptions for ointments are written in a full or short form.<br />

Officinal ointments and the ointments containing only one medicinal<br />

substance are prescribed in a short way.<br />

When ointments are prescribed in a full form, the names <strong>of</strong> medicinal<br />

substances, the base for an ointment and their amount are indicated. You should<br />

write in Subscriptio: Misce, fiat unguentum.<br />

Liniments – linimenta<br />

Liniment is a medicinal form for external use. Liniments are liquid ointments<br />

which look like homogeneous mucilaginous mass or dense liquid which melts under<br />

the body temperature. Liniments are used for rubbing into the skin and grinding, for<br />

application to wounds, burns, ulcers. <strong>The</strong> bases for liniments are vaseline oil,<br />

linseed-oil, sunflower oil and other oils. Before using a liniment should be shaked.<br />

Pastes – pastae<br />

Paste is a semisolid preparation, generally for external use, <strong>of</strong> a fatty base, a<br />

viscous or mucilaginous base, or a mixture <strong>of</strong> starch and petrolatum. It is the<br />

undivided form <strong>of</strong> medications. Thus, a paste consists <strong>of</strong> different powders (talc,<br />

starch or zinc oxide) and a base. It is a preparation similar to an ointment, but<br />

6


thicker and stiffer, that penetrates the skin less than an ointment. Pastes are<br />

prescribed in the same way as ointments.<br />

Stomalogic pastes<br />

A special version <strong>of</strong> pastes is stomatologic pastes which are prepared in small<br />

amounts in the presence <strong>of</strong> a patient. <strong>The</strong> composition <strong>of</strong> such pastes includes<br />

powderlike medicinal preparations (sometimes in the combination with liquid ones)<br />

to which as a filler glycerine, vaseline oil, vegetable oils are added to reach the<br />

necessary consistence.<br />

Stomatologic pastes are prescribed only in a full form, specifying all the<br />

ingredients.<br />

Toothpastes<br />

Toothpastes are allocated into a separate version. <strong>The</strong>y are subdivided into<br />

two groups:<br />

1) hygienic toothpastes; 2) medical preventive toothpastes.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

English, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Rp.: Iod<strong>of</strong>ormii 0,01<br />

Butyri Сасао quantam satis.<br />

Misce, ut fiat bacillus longitudine 6 сm et diametro 3 mm<br />

Dа tales doses numеro 6.<br />

Signa: insert оnе suppository 2 times а day.<br />

7


2. Rp.: Emplastri Рlumbi simplicis 50,0<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: apply to the affected skin region.<br />

3. Rp.: Extracti Bursae раstoгis sicci<br />

Extracti Secalis cornuti аnа 3,0<br />

Pulveris radicis Glycyrrhizae quantum satis,<br />

ut fiant pilulae numеro 30.<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: оnе рill 3 times а day after meals.<br />

4. Rp.: Unguenti Tetracyclini ophthalmici 10,0<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: eye ointment. Apply to the lower eyelid 3-5 times a day<br />

5. Rp.: Suppusitoria “Bethiolum” numero 10<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: for hemorrhoids and anal fissures.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Traпslate the prescriptioпs iпto Latiп. Prescribe:<br />

1. 50 grams <strong>of</strong> ointment for freezing (frost-bite). Тhе patient should rub а<br />

little ointment onto open skin regions.<br />

2. Ointment which consists <strong>of</strong>: one gram <strong>of</strong> resorcin, 10 grams <strong>of</strong><br />

vaseline. Label: ointment. Apply to the affected skin regions.<br />

3. 60 pills which include: 0,03 <strong>of</strong> crystallized sodium arsenate; 3,0 <strong>of</strong><br />

quinine hydrochloride; extract and powder <strong>of</strong> licorice root as muсh as<br />

is required. Тhe patient should take one pill 2-3 times а day.<br />

4. 40 rectal suppositories. Тhе constituents are: 0,3 euphylline, 3,0 сосоа<br />

8


utter. Тhе patient should insert 1 suppository 2 times а day.<br />

5. 10 suppositories with glycerin. Тhе patient should insert 1 suppository<br />

once а day 15-20 minutes after meals.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

I. Liniment belongs to:<br />

1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />

2) solid medicinal forms;<br />

3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />

Test № 1.<br />

II. Suppository belongs to:<br />

1) s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms;<br />

2) solid medicinal forms;<br />

3) liquid medicinal forms.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Choose the s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />

Variant 1 Variant 2<br />

1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />

2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />

3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />

4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />

5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />

6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />

7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />

Test № 3.<br />

9


Choose the lines in which there are only s<strong>of</strong>t medicinal forms:<br />

1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />

2) unguentum, linimentum;<br />

3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />

4) solutio, species;<br />

5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

Prescription-writing <strong>of</strong> liquid medicinal<br />

forms.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> medicinal forms are subdivided into solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones. Liquid<br />

forms <strong>of</strong> medications are widely used in prescriptions. <strong>The</strong> peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing<br />

out the liquid medicinal substances in prescriptions are the important aspect <strong>of</strong> the<br />

topic, that’s why it is necessary to know how Genetivus <strong>of</strong> the liquid forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications is formed.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To learn to classify medicinal forms and know their characteristics.<br />

2. To master the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each liquid medicinal form,<br />

their spelling.<br />

3. To learn to correctly write out liquid medicinal forms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Solution<br />

A liquid preparation containing one or several<br />

soluble chemical substances usually dissolved in<br />

water or other dissolving medium.<br />

3


Drop<br />

Tincture<br />

Extract<br />

Infusion<br />

Decoction<br />

Emulsion<br />

Suspension<br />

Mixture<br />

Mucilage<br />

Syrup<br />

A minute sphere <strong>of</strong> liquid as it hangs or falls.<br />

An alcoholic or hydroalcoholic solution prepared<br />

from animal or vegetable drugs or from chemical<br />

substances.<br />

A concentrated preparation <strong>of</strong> a vegetable or animal<br />

drug obtained by removing the active constituents<br />

therefrom with a suitable menstruum, evaporating all<br />

or nearly the solvent and adjusting the residual mass<br />

or powder to a prescribed standard.<br />

A product <strong>of</strong> steeping <strong>of</strong> a substance in water for the<br />

extraction <strong>of</strong> its medicinal principles.<br />

A medication or other substance prepared by boiling.<br />

A preparation <strong>of</strong> one liquid distributed in small<br />

globules throughout the body <strong>of</strong> a second liquid.<br />

A preparation <strong>of</strong> a finely divided drug intended to be<br />

incorporated (suspended) in some suitable liquid<br />

vehicle (water, oil, glycerine) before it is used, or<br />

already incorporated in such a vehicle.<br />

A liquid medicinal form which is formed by<br />

dissolving one or several solid substances or by<br />

mixing two or more substances between themselves.<br />

An artificial viscid paste <strong>of</strong> gum or dextrin used in<br />

pharmacy as a vehicle or excipient or in therapy as a<br />

demulcent.<br />

A concetrated solution <strong>of</strong> sugar, such as sucrose, in<br />

water or other aqueous liquid, sometimes with some<br />

medicinal substance added.<br />

4


4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How are the medicinal forms classified according to the consistence <strong>of</strong><br />

ingredients?<br />

2. What medicinal forms belong to liquid ones?<br />

3. Give the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> each liquid medicinal form.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

English, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Rp.: Solutionis Proserini 0,05% 1 ml<br />

Da tales doses numero 6 in ampullis<br />

Signa: one ml 1-2 times a day.<br />

2. Rp.: Extracti Polygoni hydropiperis fluidi<br />

Extracti Viburni fluidi ana 20 ml<br />

Misce. Da.<br />

Signa: 25-30 drops two times a day.<br />

3. Rp.: Infusi florum Arnicae ex 10,0 – 200 ml<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />

4. Rp.: Suspensionis Grise<strong>of</strong>ulvini 100,0<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: one dessertspoon 3 times a day.<br />

5. Rp.: Emulsi olei jecoris Aselli 100 ml<br />

5


Da.<br />

Signa: one tablespoon 2 times a day.<br />

6. Rp: Tincturae Strophanthi 5,0<br />

Tincturae Convallariae<br />

Tincturae Valerianae ana 10,0<br />

Misceatur. Detur.<br />

Signetur: 20 drops 3 times a day.<br />

7. Rp.: Sirupi Aloёs 30 ml<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Liquid medicinal forms<br />

(Formae medicamentorum molles)<br />

solutiones (solutio, onis f) – solutions<br />

guttae (gutta, ae f) – drops<br />

tincturae (tinctura, ae f) – tinctures<br />

extracta (extractum, i n) – extracts<br />

infusa et decocta (infusum, i n; decoctum, i n) – infusions and decoctions<br />

emulsa (emulsum, i n) – emulsions<br />

suspensiones (suspensio, onis f) – suspensions<br />

mixturae (mixtura, ae f) – mixtures<br />

mucilagines (mucilago, inis f) – mucilages<br />

sirupi (sirupus, i m) – syrups<br />

Solutions – solutiones<br />

6


Solution is a liquid preparation containing one or several soluble chemical<br />

substances usually dissolved in water or other dissolving medium (solvent) for<br />

various reasons.<br />

According to the purpose <strong>of</strong> use solutions are divided into:<br />

1. Solutiones pro injectionibus – solutions for injections.<br />

2. Solutiones ad usum externum – solutions for external use: gargarismata –<br />

for gargling; lotiones – for lotions; collutoria – for rinsing mouth; enemata<br />

or clysmata – for enemas; liturae – for lubrication; perlotiones – for<br />

irrigation; frictiones – for embrocation.<br />

3. Solutiones ad usum internum – solutions for internal use.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are also solutiones pro anaesthesia (solutions for anaesthesia),<br />

solutiones plasmosubstituentes (solutions for the substitution <strong>of</strong> plasma).<br />

Solutions are given in: ampullis (ampules); rectiolis (rectal pipettes, which<br />

contain 3-5 ml <strong>of</strong> solution for microenemas).<br />

Prescriptions for solutions are written in a short and full forms.<br />

In a short form the word Recipe is followed by the word Solutionis, the name<br />

<strong>of</strong> medicinal substance, the concentration <strong>of</strong> solution in percents and its amount,<br />

In a full form the word Recipe is followed by the name <strong>of</strong> a medicinal<br />

substance, its amount and the name <strong>of</strong> a solvent.<br />

Drops – guttae<br />

Drop is a minute sphere <strong>of</strong> liquid as it hangs or falls.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are:<br />

Oculoguttae – eye drops (medicated oil or water to be dropped into eyes).<br />

Nasoguttae – nose drops (medicated solution to be dropped into the nose).<br />

Otoguttae – ear drops (medicated oil or water to be dropped into the external<br />

auditory meatus).<br />

Guttae “Denta” – dental drops.<br />

Small amount <strong>of</strong> drops (5-10 ml) is prescribed in a full or short form.<br />

7


Dental drops are usually <strong>of</strong>ficinal and are prescribed in a short form.<br />

Tinctures – tincturae<br />

Tincture is an alcoholic or hydroalcoholic solution prepared from animal or<br />

vegetable drugs or from chemical substances. Tinctures usually have some colour.<br />

<strong>The</strong>y are <strong>of</strong>ficinal drug forms.<br />

When some tincture is prescribed, the word Recipe is followed by the name<br />

<strong>of</strong> a dosage form (that is: Tincturae) and then by the name <strong>of</strong> a plant and total<br />

amount in ml. When alcoholic tincture is prescribed, the word spirituosae is not<br />

written. But if ether tincture is prescribed, the word aethereae should be written.<br />

Extracts – extracta<br />

Extract is a concentrated preparation <strong>of</strong> a vegetable or animal drug obtained<br />

by removing the active constituents therefrom with a suitable menstruum,<br />

evaporating all or nearly all the solvent and adjusting the residual mass or powder to<br />

a prescribed standard.<br />

According to the extractor all extracts are divided into:<br />

extracta aquosa (water extracts);<br />

extracta oleosa (oil extracts);<br />

extracta spirituosa (spirituous, alcoholic extracts);<br />

extracta aetherea (ethereous extracts).<br />

NB! Only one etherous extract is used: Extractum Filicis maris aethereum.<br />

According to their consistency extracts are divided into: extracta fluida<br />

(fluid), spissa (thickened), sicca (dry), that is they are prepared in three forms:<br />

semiliquid or <strong>of</strong> syrupy consistency, pilular or solid, and as dry powder.<br />

Extracts are prescribed in the same way as tinctures, but their consistency<br />

should be indicated.<br />

8


Infusions and decoctions – infusa et decocta<br />

Infusion is a product <strong>of</strong> steeping <strong>of</strong> a substance in water for the extraction <strong>of</strong><br />

its medicinal principles.<br />

Decoction is a medication or other substance prepared by boiling.<br />

Infusions and decoctions are prescribed only in a short form. <strong>The</strong> amount <strong>of</strong><br />

vegetable raw materials and the amount <strong>of</strong> infusion and decoction are indicated.<br />

Emulsions – emulsa<br />

Emulsion is a preparation <strong>of</strong> one liquid distributed in small globules<br />

throughout the body <strong>of</strong> a second liquid. Pharmaceutical emulsions for which <strong>of</strong>ficial<br />

standards have been promulgated include cod-liver oil emulsion, cod-liver oil<br />

emulsion with malt, liquid petrolatum emulsion, and phenolphthalen in liquid<br />

petrolatum emulsion.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are emulsa oleosa (oil or false emulsions) and emulsa seminalia or<br />

emulsa seminum (true emulsions).<br />

Emulsions are prescribed in a full or short form.<br />

Suspensions – suspensiones<br />

Suspension is a preparation <strong>of</strong> a finely divided drug intended to be<br />

incorporated (suspended) in some suitable liquid vehicle (water, oil, glycerine)<br />

before it is used, or already incorporated in such a vehicle.<br />

Suspensions are used pro injectionibus (for injections); ad usum externum<br />

(for external use); ad usum internum (for internal use).<br />

Suspensions can be siccae (dry) and ex tempore (which should be prepared).<br />

Suspensions are prescribed in a full or short form.<br />

Mixtures – mixturae<br />

9


Mixture is a liquid medicinal form which is formed by dissolving one or<br />

several solid substances or by mixing two or more substances between themselves<br />

(solutions, tinctures, extracts, mucilage etc.). Mixtures can be limpid, turbid and<br />

with sediment.<br />

Mixtures are prescribed for both internal and external use.<br />

Mucilages – mucilagines<br />

Mucilage – 1) an artificial viscid paste <strong>of</strong> gum or dextrin used in pharmacy as<br />

a vehicle or excipient or in therapy as a demulcent; 2) a naturally formed viscid<br />

principle in a plant, consisting <strong>of</strong> a gum dissolved in the juices <strong>of</strong> the plant (gummi<br />

arabicum – arabic gum, gummi Armeniacae – gum <strong>of</strong> the apricot, amylum – starch,<br />

semina Lini – seeds <strong>of</strong> the flax, radix Althaeae – root <strong>of</strong> marsh-mallow).<br />

Mucilages are rarely prescribed separately (per se). <strong>The</strong>y are usually<br />

prescribed in mixtures, that is 20-25 % <strong>of</strong> mucilages are added to the mixtures.<br />

Syrups – sirupi<br />

Syrup is a concetrated solution <strong>of</strong> sugar, such as sucrose, in water or other<br />

aqueous liquid, sometimes with some medicinal substance added. <strong>The</strong> <strong>of</strong>ficinal<br />

preparation is a solution <strong>of</strong> sucrose in purified water, and is used as a flavoured<br />

vehicle in pharmaceutical preparations. E. g.:<br />

sirupus Rhei – syrup <strong>of</strong> rhubarb;<br />

sirupus Althaeae – syrup <strong>of</strong> marsh-mallow;<br />

sirupus Glycyrrhizae – syrup <strong>of</strong> licorice;<br />

sirupus simplex – simple syrup;<br />

sirupus Rubi idaei – syrup <strong>of</strong> raspberry.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

10


A. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into<br />

English, memorize the spelling:<br />

1. Rp.: Solutionis Glucosi 40 % 20 ml<br />

Dа in ampullis numero 6.<br />

Signa.<br />

2. Rp.: Suspensionis Hydrocortisoni acetatis 2,5 % 5 ml<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: one ml once a week (5 injections for the course <strong>of</strong> treatment).<br />

3. Rp.: Oxytetracyclini 1,0<br />

Olei Amygdalarum ad 100,0<br />

Misce, fiat suspensio<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: оnе teaspoon 3 times а day.<br />

4. Rp.: Seminum Amygdalarum dulcium 10,0<br />

Aquae destillatae ad 100 ml<br />

Misce, fiat emulsum<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />

5. Rp.: Xer<strong>of</strong>ormii<br />

Picis liquidae ana 3,0<br />

Olei Ricini 100 ml<br />

11


Misce, fiat linimentun<br />

Da.<br />

Signa: balsamic liniment.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Traпslate the prescriptioпs iпto Latiп. Prescribe:<br />

1. 6 ampules <strong>of</strong> 2,5 % promethazine hydrochloride solution. <strong>The</strong> patient should be<br />

given 1 ml intramuscular injections.<br />

2. 200 ml <strong>of</strong> tincture made from 20 grams <strong>of</strong> water pepper. <strong>The</strong> patient should take<br />

one tablespoon 3 times a day.<br />

3. 6 ampules <strong>of</strong> 2,5 % desoxycorticosterone trimethylacetat. <strong>The</strong> patient should be<br />

given 1 ml intramuscular injections for two weeks.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Choose the prescription form <strong>of</strong> the term:<br />

a) spiritus aethylicus;<br />

b) spiritui aethilico;<br />

c) spiritum aethylicum;<br />

d) spiritus aethylici;<br />

e) spiritu aethylico.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Choose the liquid medicinal forms:<br />

12


Variant 1 Variant 2<br />

1) tabuletta, ae f 1) pilula, ae f<br />

2) unguentum, i n 2) linimentum, i n<br />

3) infusum, i n 3) decoctum, i n<br />

4) pulvis, eris m 4) species, ei f<br />

5) emplastrum, i n 5) emulsum, i n<br />

6) dragee 6) sirupus, i m<br />

7) pasta, ae f 7) suppositorium, i n<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Choose the lines in which there are only liquid medicinal forms:<br />

1) decoctum, extractum fluidum;<br />

2) unguentum, linimentum;<br />

3) mucilago, emulsum;<br />

4) solutio, species;<br />

5) mixtura, sirupus.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

13


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> State<br />

Pharmacopoeia.<br />

Abbreviations in prescriptions and<br />

abbreviation-reading. <strong>The</strong> current control <strong>of</strong> the<br />

module.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

When prescribing drugs physicians <strong>of</strong>ten use set abbreviations. <strong>The</strong>y have<br />

fixed form to avoid ambiguity. Many Latin abbreviations are still in use.<br />

Knowledge <strong>of</strong> these abbreviations is essential for the dispensing pharmacist and<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten useful for the prescriber.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know the definition <strong>of</strong> an abbreviation.<br />

2) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions.<br />

3) To know what names <strong>of</strong> ingredients are not abbreviated.<br />

4) To know how words can be shortened in Praescriptio.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Foreign language<br />

Russian language<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Instructions in medicine-preparing and<br />

giving it to a patient<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Abbreviation<br />

A conventional reduction <strong>of</strong> words while writing,<br />

and also a word composed by reduction <strong>of</strong> two or<br />

more words.<br />

3


4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What is an abbreviation?<br />

2. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions?<br />

3. What names <strong>of</strong> ingredients are not abbreviated?<br />

4. How can words be shortened in Praescriptio?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Read the prescriptions, re-write them into the copy-book, write every word in<br />

the vocabulary form, translate the prescriptions into English:<br />

1. Rp.: Choles medicatae conservatae 250,0<br />

Da.<br />

Signa.<br />

2. Rp.: Olei Terebinthinae<br />

Olei Camphorae<br />

Chlor<strong>of</strong>ormii ana 100,0<br />

Misce. Da.<br />

Signa.<br />

3. Rp.: Extracti Frangulae fluidi 0,15<br />

Extracti Viburni fluidi<br />

Herbae Thymi ana 20 ml<br />

Misce. Da.<br />

Signa.<br />

4. Rp.: Olei Ricini 1,0<br />

Da tales doses numero 15 in capsulis gelatinosis.<br />

Signa.<br />

4


5. Rp.: Acidi hydrochlorici diluti 5 ml<br />

Pepsini 2 ml<br />

Aquae purificatae 180 ml<br />

Sirupi Cerasi 200 ml<br />

Misce. Da.<br />

Signa.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

When prescribing drugs physicians <strong>of</strong>ten use set abbreviations. <strong>The</strong>y have<br />

fixed form to avoid ambiguity. Many Latin abbreviations are still in use.<br />

Knowledge <strong>of</strong> these abbreviations is essential for the dispensing pharmacist and<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten useful for the prescriber.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are some rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> dosage forms, galenicals, plants’ structures, directions given<br />

to the pharmacist and some expressions are usually shortened.<br />

2. Abbreviations always end in a consonant. If a syllable which is to be<br />

shortened ends in two or more consonants all <strong>of</strong> them are written in an abbreviation.<br />

E. g. : supp. is the abbreviation <strong>of</strong> the word suppositorium.<br />

3. Ingredients having a similar name are not abbreviated to avoid confusion,<br />

e. g.: sulfas and sulfis.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> poisonous and drastic drugs are not abbreviated.<br />

5. In Praescriptio words can be shortened to one letter: D.t.d.N. – Da<br />

(Dentur) tales doses numero…<br />

<strong>The</strong> most important prescription abbreviations<br />

Abbreviation Full writing in Latin Translation into English<br />

5


āā<br />

ac, acid.<br />

amp.<br />

aq.<br />

aq. destill.<br />

but.<br />

D.<br />

D. S.<br />

D. t. d.<br />

Div. in p. aeq.<br />

extr.<br />

f.<br />

fl.<br />

fol.<br />

gttm.<br />

gtts.<br />

inf.<br />

in ampull.<br />

in tab.<br />

lin.<br />

M.<br />

N.<br />

ol.<br />

pil.<br />

ppt., praec.<br />

pulv.<br />

q. s.<br />

r., rad.<br />

Rp.<br />

Rep.<br />

ana<br />

acidum<br />

ampulla<br />

aqua<br />

aqua destillata<br />

butyrum<br />

Da<br />

Da. Signa<br />

Da tales doses<br />

Divide in partes aequales<br />

extractum<br />

fiat (fiant)<br />

flos<br />

folium<br />

guttam (sing.)<br />

guttas (plur.)<br />

infusum<br />

in ampullis<br />

in tabulettis<br />

linimentum<br />

Misce<br />

numero<br />

oleum<br />

pilula<br />

praecipitatus<br />

pulvis<br />

quantum satis<br />

radix<br />

Recǐpe<br />

Repĕte<br />

equally<br />

acid<br />

ampoule, ampule<br />

water<br />

the distilled water<br />

butter<br />

Give<br />

Give. Mark.<br />

Give such doses<br />

Divide into equal parts<br />

extract<br />

let … forms (form)<br />

flower<br />

leaf<br />

drop<br />

drops<br />

infusion<br />

in ampoules<br />

in tablets<br />

liniment<br />

Mix<br />

number<br />

oil<br />

pill<br />

precipitated<br />

powder<br />

as much as nesessary<br />

root<br />

Take<br />

Repeat<br />

6


hiz<br />

S.<br />

simpl.<br />

sir.<br />

sol.<br />

Steril.<br />

supp.<br />

tab.<br />

t-ra, tinct., tct.<br />

ung.<br />

vitr.<br />

rhizoma<br />

Signa<br />

simplex<br />

sirupus<br />

solutio<br />

Sterilisa<br />

suppositorium<br />

tabuletta<br />

tinctura<br />

unguentum<br />

vitrum<br />

rhizome<br />

Mark<br />

simple<br />

syrup<br />

solution<br />

Sterilize<br />

suppository<br />

tablet<br />

tincture<br />

ointment<br />

glass<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Translate the prescriptions into Latin,write them in the full and short forms:<br />

1. Take: <strong>The</strong> tablets “Aёronum” number 10<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

2. Take: Of valerian tincture<br />

Of lily <strong>of</strong> the valley tincture 10 ml<br />

Of belladonna tincture 2,5 ml<br />

Of menthol 0,1<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

7


3. Take: Of camphor oil 20 % 1 ml<br />

Give in ampules number 6<br />

Label.<br />

4. Take: Of infusion <strong>of</strong> the labrador-tea herb 10,0 – 150 ml<br />

Of marsh-mallow syrup 25,0<br />

Mix. Give.<br />

Label.<br />

5. Take: Of ointment <strong>of</strong> white precipitated mercury 5 % 30,0<br />

Give.<br />

Label.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Write the prescriptions without abbreviations, translate them into English:<br />

Rp.: Supp. cum Euphyllino 0,2 № 6<br />

D.<br />

S.<br />

Rp.: Ac. borici 5,0<br />

Zinci oxydi 25,0<br />

Ung. Naphthalani 45,0<br />

Am. Tritici 25,0<br />

M. D. S.<br />

Rp.: Mentholi 0,1<br />

Ol. Persicorum 10,0<br />

8


M. D. S.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

If the tablets are written out in the short form the word “tablets” is put in:<br />

a) Nom. plur.<br />

b) Gen. plur.<br />

c) Acc. Plur.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Choose the correct answer:<br />

1) <strong>The</strong> abbreviation “D.” means:<br />

a) decoctum;<br />

b) dilutus;<br />

c) depuratus;<br />

d) Da.<br />

2) <strong>The</strong> abbreviation “f.” means:<br />

a) flos;<br />

b) fiat;<br />

c) fluidus;<br />

d) folium.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

9


Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

10


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

studies<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

<strong>The</strong> notion “clinical term”. <strong>The</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terms. <strong>The</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> terms-composites<br />

in Latin and English.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> better you can analyze medical terms, that is know how to find their<br />

stems, suffixes, prefixes, and comprehend the meaning <strong>of</strong> Greek and Latin<br />

components, the easier you will learn them.<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are two main ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin:<br />

1. Affixation (adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem).<br />

2. Word combination (when two or more stems go together to form a new<br />

word).<br />

As far as clinical terms are formed mainly by the old Greek language, the<br />

students should learn Greek stems and other combining forms <strong>of</strong> the Latin words,<br />

including word terminations.<br />

Clinical terminology is one <strong>of</strong> the most difficult subsystems <strong>of</strong> the medical<br />

terminology. It includes both the names <strong>of</strong> diseases or pathologic processes and the<br />

ways <strong>of</strong> their examination and treatment.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what languages are used in medical naming.<br />

2) To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />

3) To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />

4) To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

3


4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Clinical term<br />

Affixation<br />

Word combination<br />

Word termination<br />

A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />

more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />

the whole.<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />

A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />

constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What languages are used in medical naming?<br />

2. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />

3. What are clinical terms by position?<br />

4. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Translate the terms intoEnglish:<br />

Embryologia, brachycephalia, histologia, odontogenes, sphygmographia,<br />

stomatomycosis, cryotherapia, pyuria, angiopathia, hyperacusia, tocologia,<br />

galactorrhoea, chirurgia, laparotomia, somatometria, dysosmia, haemostasis,<br />

phlebostenosis, splanchnoptosis, otorrhagia.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

4


It has turned out historically that the Greeks have originated sciences and<br />

have given their lexical material for the naming <strong>of</strong> scientific and everyday objects.<br />

Later on this word-forming tradition passed to the Romans. Both Greek and Latin<br />

languages are used in scientific naming. Greek terms-elements are used more <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

in the clinical terminology, Latin ones – in the anatomic terminology.<br />

A lot <strong>of</strong> clinical terms (names <strong>of</strong> diseases, pathological processes, methods <strong>of</strong><br />

investigation and treatment etc.) are compound words formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two<br />

or more word-forming elements derived from Greek on the whole. By their position<br />

terms-elements may be initial (standing in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word), intermediate<br />

(in the middle <strong>of</strong> a word), finite (in the end <strong>of</strong> a word). E. g.:<br />

hyper-glyk-aemia (the heightened content <strong>of</strong> sugar in the blood);<br />

chole-cyst-itis (the inflammation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder).<br />

One and the same term-element may be initial as well as finite. Depending on<br />

the position it may change its form: haem-o-philia, haemat-uria, ur-aemia.<br />

Terms-elements are joined between themselves directly or with the help <strong>of</strong><br />

connecting vowels. If the second term-element begins with a vowel, the connecting<br />

vowel is usually not used. If the second term-element begins with a consonant, the<br />

joining vowel is used. When Greek terms-elements are joined the connecting vowel<br />

-o- is used, when Latin ones are joined, the connecting vowels -i- or -o- are used.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task<br />

Translate the terms into Latin:<br />

1. Any joint disease. 2. Displacement <strong>of</strong> the liver. 3. Excision <strong>of</strong> the kidney.<br />

4. A pathological accumulation <strong>of</strong> air in tissues or organs. 5. Bile in the blood. 6.<br />

5


<strong>The</strong> scientific study <strong>of</strong> the problems <strong>of</strong> ageing. 7. Very rapid breathing. 8.<br />

Abnormally increased muscular function or activity. 9. Narrowing <strong>of</strong> the vessel. 10.<br />

A chronic disease <strong>of</strong> adults characterized by enlargement <strong>of</strong> many parts <strong>of</strong> the<br />

skeleton. 11. Science which studies psychical diseases. 12. Surgical incision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

gallbladder.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

<strong>The</strong> term-element sten- has the meaning:<br />

a) strength;<br />

b) narrowing;<br />

c) sternum<br />

Test № 2<br />

<strong>The</strong> term-element hidr- has the meaning:<br />

a) water;<br />

b) sweat;<br />

c) humidity<br />

Test № 3<br />

Choose the Greek stems corresponding to the Latin terms:<br />

1) cerebrum a) anthrop-<br />

2) ruber b) chir-<br />

3) pectus c) prosop-<br />

4) gustus d) encephal-<br />

5) homo e) steth-<br />

6) dulcis f) erythr-<br />

6


7) articulatio g) dacry-<br />

8) manus h) glyk-<br />

9) lacrima i) geus-<br />

10) facies j) arthr-<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

7


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology.<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

studies<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Word-formation. Latin prepositions in the<br />

role <strong>of</strong> prefixes.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> word-formation with the help <strong>of</strong> prefixes is called “with a prefix” way <strong>of</strong><br />

the word-formation. “With a prefix” way is productive and wide-spread in the<br />

medical terminology. Prefixes are always added to the root and form new words <strong>of</strong><br />

the same lexical grammatical class. Thus, the learning <strong>of</strong> Latin prefixes broadens<br />

the students’ vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the “with a prefix” word-forming<br />

components helps to comprehensive perception <strong>of</strong> terms and memorizing for a long<br />

time.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what languages are used in medical terminology.<br />

2) To know in what terminology Latin prefixes usually occur.<br />

3) To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />

prepositions and particles.<br />

4) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />

first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

3


Affixation<br />

Prefix<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />

root.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1) What languages are used in medical terminology?<br />

2) In what terminology do Latin prefixes usually occur?<br />

3) What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />

prepositions and particles?<br />

4) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />

first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Find the prefixes in the terms, determine the their meaning, translate the<br />

terms into English:<br />

1. Foveola suprameatica.<br />

2. Musculus depressor septi nasi.<br />

3. Foramina intravertebralia.<br />

4. Sulcus arteriae subclaviae.<br />

5. Margo superciliaris.<br />

6. Venae conjunctivales.<br />

7. Musculus extensor digiti minimi.<br />

8. Pars postsulcalis posterior.<br />

9. Arteria recurrens.<br />

10. Musculus adductor pollicis.<br />

11. Complexus ossium.<br />

4


12. Impressiones digitatae.<br />

13. Transfusio sanguinis.<br />

14. Insufficientia valvae mitralis.<br />

15. Articulatio composita.<br />

16. Nervus sublinguales.<br />

17. Nodi lymphatici praepericardiales.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Both Latin and Greek prefixes are used in medical terminology. Some <strong>of</strong><br />

them are formed by prepositions and particles and have literal meaning. <strong>The</strong>y can<br />

also express non-literal meaning (especially in clinical disciplines). <strong>The</strong>se prefixes<br />

do not change the meaning <strong>of</strong> a stem but intensify it.<br />

Latin prefixes usually occur in anatomical and histological terminology and<br />

Greek ones are widely used in clinical terminology.<br />

Combining forms derived from adjectives (Greek mes(o) – from mesos –<br />

middle), and Latin or Greek numerals (Latin uni – one, single; bi – twice; Greek<br />

mono – one, single; di – twice) which are placed in front <strong>of</strong> a word are also called<br />

prefixes.<br />

<strong>The</strong> final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix is <strong>of</strong>ten assimilated with the first consonant <strong>of</strong><br />

a stem, e. g.: afferens – afferent, conveying towards the centre (from ad – ferens);<br />

difficilis – difficult (from dis – facilis).<br />

<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants b, m, p changes into im-, e. g.:<br />

imberbis – beardless (from in – barba – beard); immobilis – immobile (from in –<br />

mobilis – mobile); impotentia – impotence (from in – potentia – potency).<br />

<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants l and r changes into il- and ircorrespondingly,<br />

e. g.: illaesus – not damaged, without lesion (from in – laesus –<br />

hurt, damaged); irrationalis – irrational (from in – rationalis – rational).<br />

Latin prepositions are usually attached to Latin stems, and Greek ones are<br />

attached to Greek stems, e. g.: pertussis – whooping cough (from Latin per –<br />

5


throuhg, tussis – cough); anaemia – anaemia (from Greek an – neg., -aemia –<br />

blood).<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are exceptions to this rule, i. e. there are some cases when a Greek<br />

prefix is attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Latin word, and a Latin prefix is attached to the<br />

stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek word, e. g.; endocervicalis – endocervical (from Greek prefix<br />

endo- and Latin word cervicalis); intrathoracalis – intrathoracic (from Latin prefix<br />

intra- and Greek word thoracalis).<br />

PREFIXES FORMED BY LATIN PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES<br />

Latin prefix Meaning Examples<br />

a-, ab-,<br />

absadantecircumcum-:<br />

colcom-<br />

away from, from<br />

to or toward,<br />

addition to<br />

prior to or<br />

in front <strong>of</strong><br />

around<br />

with or together<br />

abasia abasia – inability to walk<br />

abductio abduction – the act <strong>of</strong> abducting<br />

(drawing away) or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being abducted<br />

abstinentia abstinence – a retaining from the<br />

use <strong>of</strong> or indugence in food, stimulants, or<br />

sexual intercourse<br />

adductor adductor – the muscle which adducts<br />

(is drawn toward)<br />

afferens afferent – conveying toward a centre<br />

antebrachium antebrachium – the part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

upper member <strong>of</strong> the body between the elbow<br />

and the wrist<br />

antenatalis antenatal – prenatal<br />

circumscriptus cirtumscribed – bounded or<br />

limited; confined to a limited space<br />

collateralis collateral – secondary or accessory;<br />

not direct or immediate<br />

compositus – compound<br />

6


concorcocontradedidise-,<br />

exextra-<br />

against, opposed<br />

1) deterioration,<br />

becoming<br />

worse;<br />

2) down or<br />

away from<br />

cessation,<br />

reversal, or<br />

removal;<br />

3) negation or<br />

privation<br />

apart<br />

reversal or<br />

separation, or<br />

duplication<br />

away from,<br />

outside<br />

outside <strong>of</strong>,<br />

beyond, or in<br />

addition<br />

1) in or into;<br />

concentratio concentration: 1) increase in<br />

strength by evaporation; 2) the ratio <strong>of</strong> the mass<br />

or volume <strong>of</strong> a solute to the mass or volume <strong>of</strong><br />

the solution or solvent<br />

correlatio correlation – the degree to which<br />

one phenomenon or random variable is<br />

associated with or can be predicted from another<br />

coordinatio co-ordination – the harmonious<br />

functioning <strong>of</strong> interrelated organs and parts<br />

contraindicatio contraindication – any<br />

condition, especially any condition <strong>of</strong> disease,<br />

which renders some particular line <strong>of</strong> theatment<br />

undesirable or improper<br />

denervatio denervation – resection or removal<br />

<strong>of</strong> the nerves to an organ or part<br />

descendens descending – extending inferiorly<br />

destructivus destructive – causing destruction,<br />

destroying<br />

divergentia divergence – a spreading or<br />

tending apart<br />

disseminatio dissemination – distribution over<br />

a considerable area<br />

eventratio eventration – protrusion <strong>of</strong> the<br />

bowels from the abdomen<br />

7


ininfrainterintraobperpostpraeproresesubsuper-;<br />

supra-<br />

2) not<br />

interior to, below<br />

or beneath<br />

between or<br />

among<br />

within, into, or<br />

during<br />

against, toward<br />

throughout in<br />

space or time<br />

after or behind<br />

before, in front<br />

<strong>of</strong><br />

before, in front<br />

<strong>of</strong><br />

back, again<br />

apart<br />

under, or<br />

subordinate<br />

1) above, more<br />

than normal,<br />

excessive;<br />

exitus exitus: 1) death; 2) an exit or outlet<br />

extracellularis extracellular – outside a cell or<br />

cells<br />

incapsulatio encapsulation – the formation <strong>of</strong><br />

a capsule<br />

insanabilis incurable – not susceptible <strong>of</strong><br />

being cured<br />

infraorbitalis infraorbital – lying on or under<br />

the inferior surface <strong>of</strong> the orbit<br />

intervertebralis intervertebral – situated<br />

between two contiguous vertebrae<br />

intravenosus intravenous – within a vein or<br />

veins<br />

obturatio obturation – the act <strong>of</strong> closing or<br />

occluding<br />

perforatio perforation: 1) the act <strong>of</strong> boring or<br />

piercing through a part; 2) a hole made through a<br />

part or substance<br />

posticus posticus – posterior<br />

posthaemorrhagicus posthaemorrhagic – that<br />

which appeared or happened after haemorrhage<br />

praematurus premature – occuring before the<br />

proper time<br />

prominentia prominentia – a prominence,<br />

protrusion, or projection<br />

reversio reversion – a returning to a previous<br />

condition; regression<br />

8


trans-<br />

2) next, above in<br />

rank<br />

through, across<br />

or beyond<br />

revaccinatio revaccination – a second<br />

vaccination<br />

separatio separation – the process <strong>of</strong> taking<br />

apart or the <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> having been taken apart<br />

sublingualis sublingual – located beneath the<br />

tongue<br />

subacutus subacute – somewhat acute;<br />

between acute and chronic<br />

superficialis superficial – pertaining to or<br />

situated near the surface<br />

suprarenalis suprarenal – situared superior to<br />

a kidney<br />

superinfectio superinfection – a new infection<br />

complicating the course <strong>of</strong> antimicrobal therapy<br />

<strong>of</strong> an existing infectious process, and resulting<br />

from invasion by bacteria or fungi resistant to<br />

the drugs in use<br />

transfusio – transfusion<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the terms into English,<br />

memorize the spelling:<br />

Anatomical terms<br />

Histological terms<br />

vas afferens<br />

substantia intercellularis<br />

9


ursa subcutanea<br />

musculus extensor<br />

margo interosseus<br />

fovea sublingualis<br />

stratum intermedium<br />

textus connectivus<br />

tubulus transversus<br />

canaliculus intracelularis<br />

tubulus convolutus<br />

Clinical terms<br />

abscessus cerebri; graviditas extrauterina tubaria; divergentia absoluta;<br />

arthritis posttraumatica; vitium cordis congenitum; fractura intraarticularis;<br />

perforatio ulceris.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> English prefix “inside” corresponds to the Latin prefix:<br />

a) infrab)<br />

intrac)<br />

interd)<br />

suprae)<br />

post-<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Which Latin prefix corresponds to the English prefix “between”:<br />

a) extrab)<br />

infrac)<br />

intrad)<br />

inter-<br />

10


e) supra-<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

11


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology.<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

studies<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Greek prefixes. <strong>The</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> the termscomposites<br />

written in Latin and English. <strong>The</strong> Greek<br />

alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter combinations and<br />

aboveline signs.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> word-formation with the help <strong>of</strong> prefixes is called “with a prefix” way <strong>of</strong><br />

the word-formation. “With a prefix” way is productive and wide-spread in the<br />

medical terminology. Prefixes are always added to the root and form new words <strong>of</strong><br />

the same lexical grammatical class. Thus, the learning <strong>of</strong> Greek prefixes broadens<br />

the students’ vocabulary. <strong>The</strong> knowledge <strong>of</strong> the “with a prefix” word-forming<br />

components helps to comprehensive perception <strong>of</strong> terms and memorizing for a long<br />

time.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what languages are used in medical terminology.<br />

2) To know in what terminology Greek prefixes usually occur.<br />

3) To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes.<br />

4) To know the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />

first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem.<br />

5) To be acquainted with the Greek alphabet, the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter<br />

combinations and aboveline signs.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

3


Term<br />

Definition<br />

Affixation<br />

Prefix<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />

root.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1) What languages are used in medical terminology?<br />

2) In what terminology do Greek prefixes usually occur?<br />

3) What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes?<br />

4) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> assimilation <strong>of</strong> the final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix with the<br />

first consonant <strong>of</strong> a stem?<br />

5) What are the rules <strong>of</strong> reading <strong>of</strong> letter combinations and aboveline signs in<br />

the Greek language?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Find the prefixes in the terms, determine their meaning, translate the terms<br />

into English:<br />

1. Vena hemiazygos accessoria.<br />

2. Apophysis anularis.<br />

3. Canalis hypoglossus.<br />

4. Processus paramastoideus.<br />

5. Synchondroses sternales.<br />

6. Capsula fibrosa perivascularis.<br />

7. Ductus endolymphaticus.<br />

8. Musculus epicranius.<br />

4


9. Tractus mesencephalicus nerve trigeminalis.<br />

10. Pars sympathica.<br />

11. Toberculum epiglotticum.<br />

12. Fascia parotidea.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Both Latin and Greek prefixes are used in medical terminology. Some <strong>of</strong><br />

them are formed by prepositions and particles and have literal meaning. <strong>The</strong>y can<br />

also express non-literal meaning (especially in clinical disciplines). <strong>The</strong>se prefixes<br />

do not change the meaning <strong>of</strong> a stem but intensify it.<br />

Latin prefixes usually occur in anatomical and histological terminology and<br />

Greek ones are widely used in clinical terminology.<br />

Combining forms derived from adjectives (Greek mes(o) – from mesos –<br />

middle), and Latin or Greek numerals (Latin uni – one, single; bi – twice; Greek<br />

mono – one, single; di – twice) which are placed in front <strong>of</strong> a word are also called<br />

prefixes.<br />

<strong>The</strong> final consonant <strong>of</strong> a prefix is <strong>of</strong>ten assimilated with the first consonsnt <strong>of</strong><br />

a stem, e. g.: afferens – afferent, conveying towards the centre (from ad – ferens);<br />

difficilis – difficult (from dis – facilis).<br />

<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants b, m, p changes into im-, e. g.:<br />

imberbis – beardless (from in – barba – beard); immobilis – immobile (from in –<br />

mobilis – mobile); impotentia – impotence (from in – potentia – potency).<br />

<strong>The</strong> prefix in- followed by the consonants l and r changes into il- and ircorrespondingly,<br />

e. g.: illaesus – not damaged, without lesion (from in – laesus –<br />

hurt, damaged); irrationalis – irrational (from in – rationalis – rational).<br />

Latin prepositions are usually attached to Latin stems, and Greek ones are<br />

attached to Greek stems, e. g.: pertussis – whooping cough (from Latin per –<br />

throuhg, tussis – cough); anaemia – anaemia (from Greek an – neg., -aemia –<br />

blood).<br />

5


<strong>The</strong>re are exceptions to this rule, i. e. there are some cases when a Greek<br />

prefix is attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Latin word, and a Latin prefix is attached to the<br />

stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek word, e. g.; endocervicalis – endocervical (from Greek prefix<br />

endo- and Latin word cervicalis); intrathoracalis – intrathoracic (from Latin prefix<br />

intra- and Greek word thoracalis).<br />

GREEK PREFIXES<br />

Greek<br />

prefix<br />

Meaning<br />

Examples<br />

a-, anamphianaantiapo-<br />

negative prefix<br />

on both sides;<br />

around or about;<br />

double<br />

upward, excessive,<br />

or again<br />

effective against,<br />

opposing, or<br />

opposite, counter<br />

acting<br />

apathia apathy — lack <strong>of</strong> feeling or emotion,<br />

indifference<br />

amphiarthrosis amphiarthrosis — a form <strong>of</strong><br />

articulation permitting little motion, the apposed<br />

surfaces <strong>of</strong> bone being connected by fibrocartilage<br />

anaphoria anaphoria — a tendency for the visual<br />

axes <strong>of</strong> both eyes to divert above the horizontal<br />

plane<br />

anamnesis anamnesis — recollection<br />

antirabicus — for rabies<br />

antidiuresis antidiuresis — suppression <strong>of</strong> urinary<br />

excretion<br />

separation or<br />

derivation from<br />

apophysis apophysis — any outgrowth or<br />

swelling, especially a bony outgrowth that has<br />

6


dia-<br />

dys-<br />

ec-, ecto-<br />

through, apart,<br />

between, across or<br />

completely<br />

bad, improper,<br />

disordered,<br />

abnormal<br />

never been entirely separated from the bone <strong>of</strong><br />

which it forms a part, such as a process, tubercle,<br />

or tuberosity<br />

apoplexia apoplexy: 1. sudden neurologic<br />

impairment due to a cerebrovascular disorder,<br />

either an arterial occlusion or an intracranial<br />

haemorrhage. 2. copious extravasation <strong>of</strong> blood<br />

within any organ.<br />

diaphoresis diaphoresis — perspiration, especially<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>use perspiration<br />

diagnosis diagnosis: 1. the determination <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nature <strong>of</strong> a case <strong>of</strong> disease. 2. the art <strong>of</strong><br />

distinguishing one disease from another<br />

en-<br />

ex, exo-<br />

outside, or<br />

situated on the<br />

outside<br />

in, on<br />

dysphagia dysphagia - difficulty in swallowing<br />

ectomia ectomy — excision <strong>of</strong> an organ or part<br />

ectoderma ectoderm - the outermost layer <strong>of</strong> cells<br />

<strong>of</strong> the three primary germ layers <strong>of</strong> the embryo<br />

endo-<br />

out <strong>of</strong>, outside,<br />

away from<br />

encephalon encephalon — the brain: that part <strong>of</strong><br />

the central nervous system, contained within the<br />

cranium<br />

enuresis enuresis — involuntary discharge<br />

<strong>of</strong> urine<br />

epi-<br />

inside, inward<br />

situation, within<br />

exanthema exanthem - a skin eruption or rash<br />

exogenes exogenous — developed or originating<br />

7


outside the organism, as exogenous disease<br />

eu-<br />

hemi-<br />

hyper-<br />

upon, above,<br />

beside<br />

well, easily, good<br />

one half<br />

endogenus endogenous: 1. growing from<br />

within. 2. developing or originating within<br />

the organism, or arising from causes within<br />

the organism<br />

epicondylus epicondylus — a general term for an<br />

eminence upon a bone, above its condyle<br />

epithelium epithelium — the covering <strong>of</strong> internal<br />

and external surfaces <strong>of</strong> the body, including the<br />

lining <strong>of</strong> vessels and other small cavities<br />

hypo-<br />

eupnoe eupnea — easy or normal respiration<br />

mesometaparaperi-<br />

above, beyond,<br />

more than normal,<br />

or excessive<br />

beneath, under,<br />

below normal, or<br />

deficient<br />

in the middle,<br />

intermediate, or<br />

moderate<br />

change,<br />

transformation, or<br />

exchange<br />

hemispherium hemispherium - a general<br />

term denoting half <strong>of</strong> a spherical or spheroid<br />

structure<br />

hemiplegia hemiplegia — paralysis <strong>of</strong> one side <strong>of</strong><br />

the body<br />

hypernephroma hypernephroma — renal cell<br />

carcinoma<br />

hypogastrium hypogastrium alternative for<br />

regio pubica<br />

hypostasis hypostasis — poor or stagnant<br />

circulation in a dependent part <strong>of</strong> the body or<br />

organ, as in venous insufficiency<br />

8


pro-<br />

syn-,<br />

sym-<br />

a) beside, near<br />

b) abnormal<br />

around<br />

precursor<br />

union<br />

association<br />

or<br />

mesothelium mesothelium — the layer <strong>of</strong> flat<br />

cells, derived from the mesoderm, which<br />

lines the coelom or body cavity <strong>of</strong> the embryo<br />

metastasis metastasis — the transfer <strong>of</strong> disease<br />

from one organ or part to another not directly<br />

connected with it<br />

parotis — parotid gland<br />

paratriehosis — the growth <strong>of</strong> hair in an unusual<br />

place<br />

perigastritis perigastritis — the<br />

inflammation <strong>of</strong> the peritoneal coat <strong>of</strong> the stomach<br />

prophylaxis prophylaxis — the prevention<br />

<strong>of</strong> disease; preventive treatment<br />

progeria progeria — a syndrome <strong>of</strong> uncertain<br />

genetic inheritance, characterized by precocious<br />

senility <strong>of</strong> striking degree, with death from<br />

coronary artery disease requently<br />

occurring before 10 years <strong>of</strong> age<br />

syndactylia syndactyly - the most common<br />

congenital anomaly <strong>of</strong> the hand or foot, marked by<br />

persistence <strong>of</strong> the webbing between adjacent<br />

digits, so they are more or less completely attached<br />

symblepharon symblepharon — an adhesion<br />

9


etween the tarsal conjunctiva and the bulbar<br />

conjunctiva<br />

THE GREEK ALPHABET<br />

Greek letters <strong>The</strong> name <strong>of</strong> the letter Latin transcription<br />

Α α<br />

Β β<br />

Γ γ<br />

Δ δ<br />

Ε ε<br />

Ζ ζ<br />

Η η<br />

Θ θ<br />

Ι ι<br />

Κ κ<br />

Λ λ<br />

Μ μ<br />

Ν ν<br />

Ξ ξ<br />

Ο ο<br />

Π π<br />

Ρ ρ<br />

Σ σ ς<br />

Τ τ<br />

Υ υ<br />

Φ φ<br />

Χ χ<br />

Ψ ψ<br />

alpha<br />

beta<br />

gamma<br />

delta<br />

epsilon<br />

dzeta<br />

eta<br />

theta<br />

iota<br />

kappa<br />

lambda<br />

my<br />

ny<br />

xi<br />

omicron<br />

pi<br />

rho<br />

sigma<br />

tau<br />

ypsilon<br />

phi<br />

chi<br />

psi<br />

a<br />

b<br />

g<br />

d<br />

e (short)<br />

z<br />

e (long)<br />

th<br />

i<br />

c, k<br />

l<br />

m<br />

n<br />

x<br />

o (short)<br />

p<br />

r<br />

s<br />

t<br />

y<br />

ph<br />

ch<br />

ps<br />

10


Ω ω omega o (long)<br />

In the Old Greek alphabet there are 24 letters. <strong>The</strong> vowels: ε, η, ι, o, υ, ω, the<br />

rest are consonants.<br />

Writing and pronunciation <strong>of</strong> the Greek letters<br />

1. Sigma has two graphic signs: σ – in the beginning and in the middle <strong>of</strong> a<br />

word;<br />

ς – in the end <strong>of</strong> a word.<br />

2. Gamma (γ) is pronounced as English [g].<br />

Gamma is pronounced as English [n] before λ, χ, κ, ξ.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Greek diphthongs<br />

<strong>The</strong> diphthongs are pronounced as a single syllable. All <strong>of</strong> them are long by<br />

nature.<br />

Greek diphthong Latin writing<br />

αι<br />

ae<br />

ει<br />

i<br />

oι<br />

oe<br />

oυ<br />

u<br />

αυ<br />

au<br />

ευ<br />

eu<br />

<strong>The</strong> aboveline signs<br />

Greek words which are beginning with a vowel, a diphthong or “ρ” have a<br />

spirit (spiritus).<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are two kinds <strong>of</strong> a spirit: thick and thin.<br />

11


<strong>The</strong> thick spirit (spiritus asper) is designated by the sign (‛) above the<br />

beginning vowel.<br />

<strong>The</strong> thin spirit (spiritus lenis) is designated by the sign (’) above the<br />

beginning vowel. This sign doesn’t influence its pronunciation.<br />

<strong>The</strong> sign <strong>of</strong> a spirit is put also above “ρ” in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word but it<br />

doesn’t influence its pronunciation.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Write every word in the vocabulary form, translate the terms into English,<br />

memorize the spelling:<br />

Anatomical terms<br />

Histological terms<br />

anastomosis<br />

aponeurosis<br />

apophysis<br />

(vena) azygos<br />

epigastrium<br />

hypoglossus<br />

metaphysis<br />

perichondrium<br />

synistosis<br />

symphysis<br />

anaphasis<br />

metaphasis<br />

prophasis<br />

endothelium<br />

mesothelium<br />

epithelium<br />

endomysium<br />

perimysium<br />

synapsis<br />

parametrium<br />

Clinical terms<br />

diarrhoea, dyspnoё, hemianaesthesia, endometritis, parametritis, perimetritis,<br />

hypoglykaemia, hypertrophia, apodia, prognosis.<br />

12


Pharmaceutical terms<br />

Anaesthesinum; anhydricus, a, um; antacidus, a, um; antidotum<br />

physiologicum; diaphoreticus, a, um; Euphyllinum; Parathyreoidinum;<br />

Synoestrolum; syntheticus, a, um.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

<strong>The</strong> English prefix “around” corresponds to the Greek prefix:<br />

a) metab)<br />

hypoc)<br />

perid)<br />

endoe)<br />

ana-<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Which Greek prefix corresponds to the English prefix “above”:<br />

a) hemib)<br />

apoc)<br />

epid)<br />

diae)<br />

anti-<br />

Test № 3.<br />

13


Determine the terms with prefixes which have the meaning:<br />

a) covering membrane <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />

b) inner membrane <strong>of</strong> an organ<br />

c) cellular tissue around an organ<br />

1) endophlebitis; 2) paratyphlitis; 3) periosteum; 4) endometrium; 5)<br />

periodontium; 6) endothelium; 7) paranephritis; 8) endocardium; 9) parodontium;<br />

10) peritonaeum.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

14


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology.<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> terms-composites with the<br />

given morphemes and terms-elements.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> modern clinical terminology has been being formed during many<br />

centuries, being developed and perfected in all its components.<br />

Clinical terms are mainly formed by the way <strong>of</strong> joining <strong>of</strong> several<br />

components. <strong>The</strong> components <strong>of</strong> the compound terms which have a constant, steady<br />

meaning and form several terms <strong>of</strong> the same contents line are called termselements.<br />

In order to understand and consciously use the scientific clinical terminology<br />

it is necessary to memorize the Greek equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin words and the Greek<br />

word-forming elements.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what languages are used in medical naming.<br />

2) To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />

3) To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />

4) To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

3


Clinical term<br />

Affixation<br />

Word combination<br />

Term-element<br />

A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />

more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />

the whole.<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />

A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />

constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What languages are used in medical naming?<br />

2. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />

3. What are clinical terms by position?<br />

4. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Task № 1<br />

Form the terms with the known meanings:<br />

a) leuk- (white):<br />

white blood cell, lack <strong>of</strong> leucocytes, treatment with leucocytes, white<br />

blood, bleeding in the patients with leucosis;<br />

b) mega-, megal- (large):<br />

large eyes, large tongue, mania <strong>of</strong> greatness, increase <strong>of</strong> the large part <strong>of</strong><br />

the brain;<br />

c) erythr- (red):<br />

red blood cell, red colouring <strong>of</strong> the urine, vision <strong>of</strong> objects in red<br />

colouring, germ <strong>of</strong> the red blood cell, swallowing <strong>of</strong> erythrocytes.<br />

4


Task № 2.<br />

Form the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />

I. 1) odont(o) – (-algia, -rrhagia, -ectomia, -necrosis, -genes, -lithus);<br />

2) angi(o) – (-spasmus, -sclerosis, -paresis, -pathia, -necrosis, -tomia).<br />

II. 1) -sclerosis (arthr-, angi-, chondr-, ten-, pyel-);<br />

2) -mycosis (haemat-, stomat-, enter-, bronch-, colp-).<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong>re are two basic ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin:<br />

1. Affixation (adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem). <strong>The</strong> words formed by<br />

affixation are called derived words.<br />

2. Word combination (when two or more stems go together to form a new<br />

word). <strong>The</strong> words formed this way are called compound ones.<br />

Latin words are joined by the vowels -i- and -o-, e. g.: mult-i-cellularis<br />

(multicellular); sacr-o-lumbalis (sacrolumbar); cerebr-o-spinalis (cerebrospinal).<br />

Greek words are joined by the vowel -o-, e. g.: arthr-o-pathia (the disease <strong>of</strong><br />

joints). When the second word begins with a vowel, then -o- is <strong>of</strong>ten dropped, e. g.:<br />

neuralgia (neuralgia); adenectomia (adenectomy).<br />

<strong>The</strong> stems <strong>of</strong> the words in Gen. sing. are most frequently used to form<br />

compound and derived words, e. g.: dermatitis (from derma, dermat-is (skin))<br />

means inflammation <strong>of</strong> the skin, dermatologia is the science about skin diseases.<br />

Sometimes the stem <strong>of</strong> the word in Nom. sing. (the so-called pseudostem) is<br />

used for better pronunciation, e. g.: py-o-derm-ia (purulent inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

skin); epi-derm-is (epidermis).<br />

In a compound noun an attribute usually comes first whereas the head word is<br />

the final element (it is called a word termination or a term-element), e. g.:<br />

5


dermatologia (derma, atis – skin; logia – science) is the science which studies skin<br />

diseases.<br />

A term-element is a steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word. It has constant<br />

meaning and can form several terms, e, g.: the term-element – algia denotes the<br />

pain <strong>of</strong> inorganic origin, e. g.:<br />

gastralgia (stomachache); odontalgia (toothache); myalgia (pain in the<br />

muscles), etc.<br />

As far as clinical terms are formed mainly by the old Greek language, the<br />

students should learn Greek stems and other combining forms <strong>of</strong> the Latin words,<br />

including word terminations.<br />

Clinical terminology is one <strong>of</strong> the most difficult subsystems <strong>of</strong> the medical<br />

terminology. It includes both the names <strong>of</strong> diseases or pathologic processes and the<br />

ways <strong>of</strong> their examination and treatment.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task №1.<br />

Make up the terms <strong>of</strong> the given terms-elements:<br />

I. 1) gloss (o) – (-algia, -ectomia, -pathia, -plegia, -scopia)<br />

2) myel (o) – (-cele, -graphia, -pathia, -odynia)<br />

3) phleb (o) – (-logia, -graphia, -rrhaphia, -rrhogia, -ectasia)<br />

II. 1) –tomia (phleb-, cholecyst-, tonsilt-, spondyl-, blephar-)<br />

2) –logia (bio-, phyt-, cyt-, aeti-, hist-)<br />

3) –algia (mast-, cyst-, aden-, blephar-, cholecyst-)<br />

Task №2.<br />

6


Form the terms with the known meaning:<br />

a) encephal- (brain):<br />

stone in the brain, bleeding from the brain, brain hernia, s<strong>of</strong>tening <strong>of</strong><br />

the brain, headache;<br />

b) neur- (nerve):<br />

cutting <strong>of</strong> the nerve, putting stitches on the nerve, extraction <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nerve, germ <strong>of</strong> the nerve cell;<br />

c) ophthalm- (eye):<br />

pain in the eye, disease <strong>of</strong> the eyes, paralysis <strong>of</strong> the eye muscles,<br />

leaking from the eye;<br />

d) enter- (intestine):<br />

science <strong>of</strong> the intestines, fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine, transplantation <strong>of</strong><br />

intestines, spasm <strong>of</strong> the intestine, artificial opening in the intestine;<br />

e) my- (muscle):<br />

knowledge <strong>of</strong> muscles, muscle pain, muscle spasm, disease <strong>of</strong> muscles,<br />

cutting <strong>of</strong> the muscle;<br />

f) gastr- (stomach):<br />

extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach, stomach bleeding, extraction <strong>of</strong> the stomach<br />

and duodenum, stomach leaking.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

Find the Latin term corresponding to the English one “vision <strong>of</strong> subjects in<br />

the yellow colour”:<br />

a) cyanopsia;<br />

b) erythropsia;<br />

c) macropsia;<br />

d) xanthopsia.<br />

7


Test № 2.<br />

Find the Latin term corresponding to the English one “lowering <strong>of</strong> the pain<br />

sense”:<br />

a) hyperalgesia;<br />

b) hypalgesia;<br />

c) analgesia;<br />

d) anaesthesia.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “myopathia”:<br />

a) disease <strong>of</strong> the spinal cord;<br />

b) progressing muscle dystrophy;<br />

c) neurastheny <strong>of</strong> the spinal cord.<br />

Test № 4.<br />

Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “pneumectomia”:<br />

a) cutting <strong>of</strong> the lung;<br />

b) excision <strong>of</strong> the lung;<br />

c) breaking <strong>of</strong> the lung.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

8


<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the<br />

studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescriptionwriting”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong><br />

clinical terminology.<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

<strong>The</strong> formation <strong>of</strong> terms-names <strong>of</strong> the<br />

inflammatory, uninflammatory and tumour<br />

diseases.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

Affixation is adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem. It is one <strong>of</strong> the main<br />

ways <strong>of</strong> forming new words in Latin.<br />

In order to form the clinical terms – the names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />

uninflammatory and tumour diseases, the corresponding suffixes are used. <strong>The</strong><br />

students must know these suffixes, their meaning and the rules <strong>of</strong> adding them to<br />

the stem. This knowledge together with practical skills and habits <strong>of</strong> forming<br />

clinical terms helps the students to master clinical terminology.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what affixation is.<br />

2) To know the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />

uninflammatory and tumour diseases.<br />

3) To know how to add the suffixes to the stems.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Afixation<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

3


Suffix<br />

A word-forming morpheme, a part <strong>of</strong> a word<br />

between a root and an ending.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What is affixation?<br />

2. What are the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />

uninflammatory and tumour diseases?<br />

3. How are the suffixes added to the stems?<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Form the terms with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffixes, translate into Latin:<br />

1. -itis, itidis f: inflammation <strong>of</strong>: the tongue, the mucous membrane <strong>of</strong> the<br />

mouth cavity, the brain, the tear gland, the blind gut, the calix and<br />

bladder, the tooth pulp, the ear, the intestine, the stomach.<br />

2. -osis, is f: uninflammatory disease: excessive pigmentation <strong>of</strong> the skin,<br />

functional disorder <strong>of</strong> the nervous system, disease <strong>of</strong> vertebrae,<br />

narrowing, poisoning, temporary increase <strong>of</strong> leukocyte number in<br />

the blood, hypertrophy <strong>of</strong> the thyroid gland, increase <strong>of</strong> thrombocyte<br />

number.<br />

3. -iasis, is f: uninflammatory disease: stone disease, bladder stone disease ,<br />

gallbladder stone disease, kidney stone disease, tooth stone disease,<br />

ear stone disease, vein stone disease.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

4


In Latin clinical terminology the following suffixes meaning the names <strong>of</strong> the<br />

inflammatory, uninflammatory and tumour diseases are used:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> suffix -it-is (Gen. sing. -itid-is) is a word termination denoting<br />

inflammation <strong>of</strong> the part indicated by the word stem to which it is attached. E. g.:<br />

Latin noun<br />

Stem <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />

noun<br />

Examples<br />

articulatio, onis f<br />

glandula, ae f<br />

vas, vasis n<br />

auris, is f<br />

oculus, i m<br />

ren, renis m<br />

vena, ae f<br />

gaster, gastris f<br />

arthradenangiotophthalmnephrphlebgastr-<br />

arthritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong><br />

joints)<br />

adenitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> a<br />

gland or lymphatic node)<br />

angiitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

walls <strong>of</strong> blood vessels)<br />

otitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the ear)<br />

ophthalmitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong><br />

the eye or <strong>of</strong> the conjunctiva or deeper<br />

structures <strong>of</strong> the eye)<br />

nephritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

kidney)<br />

phlebitis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

vein)<br />

gastritis, itidis f (inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

stomach)<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> suffix -os-is is a word termination denoting a process, especially a<br />

disease or morbid process, and sometimes conveying the meaning <strong>of</strong> abnormal<br />

increase. <strong>The</strong> suffix is added either to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek or Latin noun. E. g.:<br />

5


Latin noun<br />

Stem <strong>of</strong> the Greek<br />

noun<br />

Examples<br />

articulatio, onis f<br />

ren, renis m<br />

fungus, i m<br />

arthr-<br />

nephr-<br />

myc-<br />

arthrosis, is f (a disease <strong>of</strong> a joint)<br />

nephrosis, is f (any disease <strong>of</strong> the<br />

kidneys<br />

characterized by purely degenerative<br />

lesions<br />

<strong>of</strong> the renal tubules)<br />

mycosis, is f (a fungoid disease)<br />

3. <strong>The</strong> suffix -ias-is is a word termination meaning the process or the<br />

condition resulting therefrom, particularly <strong>of</strong> a morbid condition. It is usually<br />

attached to the stem <strong>of</strong> a Greek noun. E. g.:<br />

psoriasis, is f psoriasis (from the Greek psoriasis psoriasis) – a common<br />

chronic, squamous dermatosis with polygenic inheritance and a fluctuating course;<br />

leontiasis, is f leontiasis (from the Greek leon, leontos (lion) leontiasis) –<br />

the leonine face <strong>of</strong> lepromatous leprosy, due to nodular invasion <strong>of</strong> the<br />

subcutaneous tissue <strong>of</strong> the face, giving it a vaguely leonine appearance;<br />

trichiasis, is f trichiasis (from the Greek trix, trichos (hair) trichiasis) – 1)<br />

a condition <strong>of</strong> ingrowing hairs about an orifice, or <strong>of</strong> ingrowing eyelashes; 2) the<br />

appearance <strong>of</strong> hairlike filaments in the urine.<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> suffix -oma means a tumour. All nouns with the suffix -oma are<br />

neuter. E.g.:<br />

adenoma, atis n – adenoma, tumour (a benign epithelial tumour in which the<br />

cells form recognizable glandular structures or in which the cells are clearly derived<br />

from glandular epithelium (from Greek aden, adenis m gland);<br />

6


fibroma, atis n – fibroma (a tumour composed mainly <strong>of</strong> fibrous or fully<br />

developed connective tissue, called also fibroid and fibroid tumour (from Latin<br />

fibra, ae f fiber)).<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1.<br />

Form the terms with the suffixoma, explain their meaning:<br />

1. Derma, dermat-. 2. Hepar, hepat-. 3. Mys, my-. 4. Fibra, fibr-. 5. Chondros,<br />

chondr-. 6. Neuron, neur-. 7. Lipos, lip-. 8. Odus, odont-. 9. Sarx, sarc-. 10.<br />

Ganglion, gangli-. 11. Sialon, sial-. 12. Lymph-. 13. Pleur-. 14. Papill-. 15. Oste-.<br />

Task № 2.<br />

Find the suffixes which have the meaning:<br />

a) inflammatory diseases; b) tumours; c) uninflammatory diseases.<br />

1. Pulpitis. 2. Leontiasis. 3. Acidosis. 4. Spodylosis. 5. Keratoma. 6.<br />

Myosarcoma. 7. Periostitis. 8. Osteosis. 9. Mycosis. 10. Cholelithiasis. 11. Parotitis.<br />

12. Leucocytosis. 13. Lymphoma. 14. Arthritis. 15. Melanosis. 16. Psychosis. 17.<br />

Meningioma. 18. Elephantiasis. 19. Mastosis. 20. Laryngitis. 21. Urolithiasis. 22.<br />

Kyphosis. 23. Encephalosis. 24. Stomatitis. 25. Hepatosis.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1.<br />

7


organ:<br />

Choose the term in which the suffix means the inflammatory process in the<br />

a) arthrosis;<br />

b) arthralgia;<br />

c) arthropathia;<br />

d) arthritis;<br />

e) arthrodynia.<br />

Test № 2.<br />

Choose the term in which the suffix means the tumour:<br />

a) nephrosis;<br />

b) nephritis;<br />

c) nephroma;<br />

d) nephropexia;<br />

e) nephropathia.<br />

Test № 3.<br />

Choose the term in which the suffix means the uninflammatory disease:<br />

a) osteoma;<br />

b) ostitis;<br />

c) osteotomia;<br />

d) osteosis;<br />

e) osteopathia.<br />

Test № 4.<br />

8


Find the term corresponding to the meaning “inflammation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

periosteum”:<br />

a) periodontitis;<br />

b) periostitis;<br />

c) periostosis;<br />

d) parodontitis.<br />

Test № 5.<br />

Find the English term corresponding to the Latin one “pyelonephritis”:<br />

a) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the calix and bladder;<br />

b) inflammation <strong>of</strong> the calix and kidney;<br />

c) purulent inflammation <strong>of</strong> the kidneys.<br />

Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

9


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content module № 3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying<br />

<strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> clinical<br />

terminology.<br />

Clinical terminology.<br />

<strong>The</strong> translation <strong>of</strong> some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic<br />

sections <strong>of</strong> medicine: therapy, surgery, nervous<br />

diseases, haematology, stomatology and others<br />

into Latin. <strong>The</strong> current content control.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

To know how to diagnose the case is very important for a doctor.<br />

While being acquainted with some diagnoses and training in the translation <strong>of</strong><br />

some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine the students learn to use Latin<br />

clinical terminology.This will be helpful in their future practice.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1) To know what a diagnosis is.<br />

2) To know the common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />

3) To know how to translate some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Anatomy, histology<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> pathologies<br />

4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Definition<br />

Diagnosis<br />

<strong>The</strong> determination <strong>of</strong> a disease on the grounds <strong>of</strong> a<br />

patient’s examination.<br />

4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. What is a diagnosis?<br />

2. Name some common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />

3. Translate some diagnoses from Latin into English and on the contrary.<br />

4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

3


Write down and memorize the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> every word, translate the<br />

clinical diagnoses into English:<br />

1. Oedema haemorrhagicum membrorum. 2. Necrosis hepatis toxica. 3. Asthma<br />

bronchiale, forma infectiosoallergica. 4. Bronchitis endogena toxica cum<br />

syndromo obstructivo manifesto, cursus gravis. 5. Insufficientia renalis. 6. Hernia<br />

umbilicalis incarcerata. 7. Aneurysma parietis anterioris ventriculi sinistri<br />

acutum. 8. Abscessus lobi superioris pulmonis dextri acutus. 9. Phlebectasia<br />

membrorum inferiorum. 10. Tuberculosis lobi superioris pulmonis dextri focalis.<br />

<strong>The</strong> contents <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

While being acquainted with some diagnoses and training in the translation <strong>of</strong><br />

some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong> medicine: therapy, surgery, nervous<br />

diseases, haematology, stomatology and others from Latin into English and from<br />

English into Latin, the students learn to use Latin clinical terminology.<br />

A lot <strong>of</strong> clinical terms (names <strong>of</strong> diseases, pathological processes, methods <strong>of</strong><br />

investigation and treatment etc.) are compound words formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two<br />

or more word-forming elements derived from Greek on the whole. By their position<br />

terms-elements may be initial (standing in the beginning <strong>of</strong> a word), intermediate<br />

(in the middle <strong>of</strong> a word), finite (in the end <strong>of</strong> a word). E. g.:<br />

hyper-glyk-aemia (the heightened content <strong>of</strong> sugar in the blood);<br />

chole-cyst-itis (the inflammation <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder).<br />

<strong>The</strong>se clinical terms are used in making the diagnoses.<br />

<strong>The</strong> materials for self-control:<br />

1. <strong>The</strong> tasks for self-control<br />

Task № 1<br />

Write down and memorize the vocabulary form <strong>of</strong> every word, translate the<br />

clinical diagnoses into Latin:<br />

1. Emphysema <strong>of</strong> lungs, respiratory insufficiency, stage I. 2. Thrombosis <strong>of</strong><br />

the central vein <strong>of</strong> retina. 3. Cutaneous edema with necrosis. 4. Penetrating ulcer. 5.<br />

Fulminant hepatitis. 6. Trembling palsy. 7. Recurrent endomyocarditis. 8.<br />

4


Myocardial infarction <strong>of</strong> the anterior wall <strong>of</strong> the left ventricle. 9. Cirrhotic<br />

tuberculosis <strong>of</strong> the upper lobe <strong>of</strong> the left lung. 10. Paresis <strong>of</strong> the lower limbs.<br />

Task № 2<br />

Traslate into English the record <strong>of</strong> the post-mortem examination:<br />

Endocarditis chronica fibrosa valvulae mitralis. Vitium cordis. Stenosis et<br />

insufficientia valvulae mitralis. Hypertrophia et dilatio cordis. Cirrhosis hepatis.<br />

Ascites. Anasarca. Arteriosclerosis generalisata.Cicatrices myocardii.<br />

Nephrocirrhosis arteriosclerotica. Emphysema pulmonum senile.<br />

B. <strong>The</strong> tests for self-control<br />

Test № 1<br />

Choose the diagnosis with the meaning “pulmonary tuberculosis”:<br />

a) abscessus pulmonum;<br />

b) infiltratio pulmonum tuberculosa;<br />

c) phthisis pulmonum.<br />

Test № 2<br />

Choose the second part <strong>of</strong> the clinical term corresponding by sense:<br />

1. diabetes; 2. otitis; 3. parotitis; 4. sclerosis; 5. rhinitis; 6. cirrhosis; 7.<br />

atrophia<br />

a) purulenta;<br />

b) allergica;<br />

c) splenogenes;<br />

d) myelopathica;<br />

e) mellitus;<br />

f) epidemica;<br />

g) disseminata<br />

Literature<br />

5


Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

6


Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

<strong>The</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>state</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Ukraine</strong><br />

“Ukrainian Medical Stomatological Academy”<br />

“Approved”<br />

at the sitting <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

<strong>of</strong> foreign languages<br />

with Latin language and<br />

medical terminology<br />

Head <strong>of</strong> the chair<br />

Docent _____________<br />

Sologor I.M.<br />

“____” ________200__<br />

Methodical Instructions<br />

for independent work <strong>of</strong> students<br />

during the training for the practical studies<br />

Academic discipline<br />

Module № 2<br />

Content modules №№ 1-3<br />

<strong>The</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> the studies<br />

Latin language.<br />

Lexical and syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying<br />

<strong>of</strong> the topic “Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />

Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> clinical<br />

terminology.<br />

1. Lexical provision <strong>of</strong> the studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

“Principles <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing”.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> notion <strong>of</strong> prescription. <strong>The</strong> <strong>state</strong> pharmacopoeia.<br />

3. Clinical terminology.<br />

<strong>The</strong> summary module control.<br />

Year 1<br />

Department<br />

medical<br />

Poltava – 2008<br />

2


<strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic:<br />

<strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> practical habits on the discipline “Latin language and medical<br />

terminology” includes the practical use <strong>of</strong> the rules <strong>of</strong> the prescription-writing in the<br />

translation and in solving the prescription tasks; the automatism in writing the<br />

names <strong>of</strong> the pharmaceutical preparations which contain the specialized<br />

pharmacological, therapeutic, chemical and other information; the automatism in<br />

the perception and written representation <strong>of</strong> the terms-composites <strong>of</strong> the Greek and<br />

Latin origin; the easy translation <strong>of</strong> the main clinical diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the principal<br />

medical branches – therapy, surgery, nervous diseases, stomatological diseases,<br />

gynaecology and others. <strong>The</strong> actuality <strong>of</strong> the topic “<strong>The</strong> summary module control”<br />

is in the checking <strong>of</strong> the quality <strong>of</strong> the knowledge, skills and habits acquired by<br />

students.<br />

2. <strong>The</strong> specific aims:<br />

1. To know how to use the verbs in the prescription form.<br />

2. To know what the chemical nomenclature is.<br />

3. To know what Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements are.<br />

4. To know the kinds <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides and salts, the ways <strong>of</strong> forming their<br />

Latin names.<br />

5. To know how to translate the names <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds from Latin<br />

into English and on the contrary.<br />

6. To know the combining forms denoting the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />

preparation.<br />

7. To know the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological<br />

and pharmacological meaning.<br />

8. To know how to distinguish different combining forms in the names <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal preparations.<br />

9. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> some botanical and pharmaceutical names <strong>of</strong><br />

medicinal plants in English.<br />

10. To know the definition and the structure <strong>of</strong> a prescription.<br />

3


11. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing.<br />

12. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />

13. To know the medicinal forms and the peculiarities <strong>of</strong> writing them out.<br />

14. To know the additional inscriptions in prescriptions.<br />

15. To know the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in prescriptions.<br />

16. To know the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms.<br />

17. To know what clinical terms are by position.<br />

18. To know how terms-elements are joined into terms.<br />

19. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />

prepositions and particles.<br />

20. To know the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes.<br />

21. To know the suffixes used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />

uninflammatory and tumour diseases.<br />

22. To know how to translate some diagnoses <strong>of</strong> the basic sections <strong>of</strong><br />

medicine.<br />

3. Basic knowledge, skills, habits, necessary for studying <strong>of</strong> the topic<br />

(inter-disciplinary integration).<br />

<strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> the preceding disciplines <strong>The</strong> acquired knowledge<br />

Russian language and English language<br />

School course <strong>of</strong> chemistry<br />

School course <strong>of</strong> botany<br />

<strong>The</strong> grammatical categories <strong>of</strong> a verb,<br />

the description <strong>of</strong> conjugations, the<br />

determination <strong>of</strong> the verb stem, the<br />

imperative mood.<br />

<strong>The</strong> Latin names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements,<br />

the structure <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides, salts and<br />

esters.<br />

Methods <strong>of</strong> classifying different kinds<br />

<strong>of</strong> plants. <strong>The</strong> basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />

generic and specific names <strong>of</strong> plants<br />

4


4. <strong>The</strong> tasks for independent work during the training for the studies<br />

4.1. <strong>The</strong> list <strong>of</strong> basic terms, parameters, characteristics, which the<br />

student should master while training for the studies.<br />

Term<br />

Person<br />

Number<br />

Tense<br />

Mood<br />

Voice<br />

Conjugation<br />

Chemical nomenclature<br />

Chemical element<br />

Acid<br />

Oxide<br />

Salt<br />

Ester<br />

Scientific (systemic) name<br />

Definition<br />

Who is the subject, i. e., who performs the action,<br />

from the speaker’s point <strong>of</strong> view.<br />

How many subjects, singular or plural.<br />

<strong>The</strong> time <strong>of</strong> action; Latin has six tenses.<br />

<strong>The</strong> manner <strong>of</strong> indicating the action or <strong>state</strong> <strong>of</strong> being<br />

<strong>of</strong> the verb; like English, Latin has the indicative<br />

(which “indicates” facts), the imperative (which<br />

orders actions), and the subjunctive (which describes,<br />

in particular, hypothetical or potential actions).<br />

An indication, with transitive verbs (those that can<br />

take direct objects), <strong>of</strong> whether the subject performs<br />

the action (the active voice) or receives it (passive).<br />

Latin verbs are divided into four conjugations.<br />

A classified system <strong>of</strong> the names <strong>of</strong> chemical<br />

elements and compounds which are used as<br />

medicinal substances.<br />

<strong>The</strong> second declension neuter noun having the<br />

ending –um in Nom. sing.<br />

A chemical compound having a sour taste.<br />

Combination <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> an average degree <strong>of</strong><br />

oxidation with oxygen.<br />

Compound substance, combination <strong>of</strong> alkali and acid<br />

in one.<br />

5


Trivial (agreed) name<br />

Prescription<br />

Dosage forms <strong>of</strong><br />

medications<br />

Solid, liquid, s<strong>of</strong>t<br />

Abbreviation<br />

Clinical term<br />

Affixation<br />

Word combination<br />

Word termination<br />

Prefix<br />

Suffix<br />

Word combination<br />

Term-element<br />

Organic combination containing oxygen.<br />

<strong>The</strong> composition and location <strong>of</strong> components<br />

corresponding to the composition and structure <strong>of</strong> a<br />

chemical compound’s molecule.<br />

Convenient for practical use because <strong>of</strong> its simple<br />

phonetic and grammar structure and short form.<br />

Prescription is an address <strong>of</strong> a doctor to a<br />

pharmaceutical chemist with the instructions in<br />

medicine-preparing and giving it to a patient.<br />

Final products administered to the patient.<br />

All the medications divided according to the<br />

consistence <strong>of</strong> ingredients.<br />

A conventional reduction <strong>of</strong> words while writing,<br />

and also a word composed by reduction <strong>of</strong> two or<br />

more words.<br />

A compound word formed by the joining <strong>of</strong> two or<br />

more word-forming elements derived from Greek on<br />

the whole.<br />

Adding prefixes and suffixes to the stem.<br />

Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />

A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />

constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />

A part <strong>of</strong> a word, a morpheme, standing before a<br />

root.<br />

A word-forming morpheme, a part <strong>of</strong> a word<br />

between a root and an ending.<br />

Joining <strong>of</strong> two or more stems to form a new word.<br />

A steady element <strong>of</strong> a compound word which has<br />

constant meaning and can form several terms.<br />

6


4.2. <strong>The</strong> theoretical questions to the studies:<br />

1. How many conjugations are Latin verbs divided into?<br />

2. How is the conjugation determined?<br />

3. How is the singular imperative formed?<br />

4. How is the plural imperative formed?<br />

5. What does chemical nomenclature include?<br />

6. What are the names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements?<br />

7. How are the names <strong>of</strong> acids, oxides and salts formed?<br />

8. What combining forms denote the chemical structure <strong>of</strong> the drug<br />

preparation?<br />

9. Name the combining forms with therapeutic, anatomic, physiological and<br />

pharmacological meaning.<br />

10. What is a prescription?<br />

11. How many parts does a prescription consist <strong>of</strong>? Characterize each <strong>of</strong><br />

them.<br />

12. What are the rules <strong>of</strong> prescription-writing?<br />

13. What are the additional inscriptions in prescriptions?<br />

14. What medicinal forms belong to solid, liquid and s<strong>of</strong>t ones?<br />

15. What is an abbreviation? What are the rules <strong>of</strong> abbreviating in<br />

prescriptions?<br />

16. What is the way <strong>of</strong> forming <strong>of</strong> the most clinical terms?<br />

17. What are clinical terms by position?<br />

18. How are terms-elements joined into terms?<br />

19. What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used prefixes formed by Latin<br />

prepositions and particles?<br />

20. What is the meaning <strong>of</strong> the most widely used Greek prefixes?<br />

21. What suffixes are used to form the terms-names <strong>of</strong> the inflammatory,<br />

uninflammatory and tumour diseases?<br />

22. Name some common clinical terms used in diagnoses.<br />

7


4.3. <strong>The</strong> practical works (tasks) which are done at the studies:<br />

Test tasks for total module control on Latin language and medical terminology<br />

(Module 2)<br />

“Lexico-syntactical provision <strong>of</strong> the topic “Pharmaceutical terminology”.<br />

Lexical and analytico-syntactical studying <strong>of</strong> the topic “Clinical terminology”.<br />

Task 1 (5 marks). Determine the conjugation <strong>of</strong> the verbs:<br />

1) habere; 2) audire; 3) sterilisare; 4) signare; 5) miscere; 6) servare; 7)<br />

vertere; 8) dare; 9) recipere; 10) repetere.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) I; b) II; c) III; d) IV.<br />

Task 2 (5 marks). Choose the numbers <strong>of</strong> the verbs given in Task 1 which<br />

form Plural imperative with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffixes:<br />

a) -te; b) -ĭte.<br />

Task 3 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> chemical elements in Latin are:<br />

a) masculine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 3-rd declension;<br />

b) neuter nouns <strong>of</strong> the 2-nd declension;<br />

c) feminine nouns <strong>of</strong> the 1-st declension.<br />

Task 4 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> acids with high degree <strong>of</strong> oxidation are made<br />

up with the help <strong>of</strong> the suffix:<br />

a) -os-; b) -ic-; c) -ul-; d) -id-.<br />

Task 5 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids are formed with the help <strong>of</strong><br />

the component:<br />

a) hyper-; b) hyp(o)-; c) hydr(o)-; d) hygr(o)-.<br />

8


prefix:<br />

Task 6 (1 marks). <strong>The</strong> names <strong>of</strong> basic salts are formed with the help <strong>of</strong> the<br />

a) super-; b) sub-; c) supra-; d) ultra-.<br />

Task 7 (1 mark). A prescription consists <strong>of</strong>:<br />

a) 6 parts; b) 9 parts; c) 10 parts.<br />

Task 8 (5 marks). Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the Latin names:<br />

1) Chelidonium; 2) Absinthium; 3) Digitalis; 4) Chamomilla; 5) Glycyrrhiza;<br />

6) Mentha piperita; 7) Foeniculum; 8) Filix mas; 9) Hypericum; 10) Urtica.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) liquorice f) wormwood<br />

b) celadine g) pepper-mint<br />

c) St. John’s wort h) foxglove<br />

d) male fern i) camomile<br />

e) nettle j) fennel<br />

Task 9 (4 marks). Choose the prescription variant <strong>of</strong> the compounds’ names:<br />

1. a) spiritus aethylicus; 2. a) sulfur praecipitatum;<br />

b) spiritus aethylici; b) sulfuri praecipitato;<br />

c) spiritum aethylicum; c) sulfuris praecipitati;<br />

3. a) solutionis Iodi spirituosae; 4. a) aqua Menthae;<br />

b) solutio Iodi spirituosa; b) aquae Menthae;<br />

c) solutiones Iodi spirituosae; c) aquam Menthae;<br />

Task 10 (5 marks). Determine the names <strong>of</strong> anions:<br />

1) sulfas; 2) hydroiodidum; 3) mitris; 4) sulfidum; 5) arsenas; 6)<br />

hydrochloridum; 7) sulfis; 8) iodidum; 9) nitras; 10) hydrobromidum.<br />

9


Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with larger content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />

b) salts <strong>of</strong> acids with smaller content <strong>of</strong> oxygen;<br />

c) salts <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids;<br />

d) salts <strong>of</strong> oxygenless acids with organic base.<br />

Task 11 (5 marks). Determine the types <strong>of</strong> chemical compounds:<br />

1) acidum sulfuricum; 2) Argenti sulfas; 3) Hydrogenii peroxydum; 4)<br />

Hydrargyri cyanidum; 5) Calcii chloridum; 6) Benzylpenicillinum-natrium; 7)<br />

Aethylmorphini hydrochloridum; 8) Plumbi oxydum; 9) acidum hydrochloricum;<br />

10) Natrii benzoas.<br />

Variants <strong>of</strong> answers:<br />

a) acids<br />

b) salts<br />

c) oxides<br />

Task 12 (5 marks). Agree the adjectives with the nouns:<br />

1) remedium (cardinalis, e)<br />

2) pulvis (subtilis, e)<br />

3) aqua (destillatus, a, um)<br />

4) succus (naturalis, e)<br />

5) capsula (gelatinosus, a, um)<br />

6) vitrum (fuscus, a, um)<br />

7) extractum (spissus a, um)<br />

8) sirupus (simplex, icis)<br />

9) solutio (spirituosus, a, um)<br />

10) acidum (boricus, a, um)<br />

Task 13 (1 mark). <strong>The</strong> term “pyelocystitis” means the inflammation <strong>of</strong>:<br />

a) calix and kidney;<br />

10


) gall-bladder;<br />

c) calix and bladder;<br />

d) urino-genital system.<br />

Task 14 (5 marks). Add the second part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />

1) oto… (fungoid disease <strong>of</strong> the ear); 2) xero… (dry lips); 3) teno… (release<br />

<strong>of</strong> the tendon from scars); 4) haemo… (treatment with the blood); 5) nephro…<br />

(kidney bleeding).<br />

Task 15 (5 marks). Add the first part <strong>of</strong> the term according to the meaning:<br />

1) …ectasia (vein dilation); 2) …pathia (disease <strong>of</strong> the gall-bladder); 3)<br />

…therapia (theatment with plants); 4) …pexia (fixation <strong>of</strong> the intestine); 5) …cele<br />

(brain hernia).<br />

Task 16 (5 marks). Choose the Greek stems corresponding to the Latin terms:<br />

1) ventriculus a) anthrop-<br />

2) humerus b) lapar-<br />

3) glandula c) cardi-<br />

4) cor d) erythr-<br />

5) cartilago e) aden-<br />

6) abdomen f) pharmac-<br />

7) ruber g) col-<br />

8) medicamentum h) brachi-<br />

9) crassum i) gastr-<br />

10) homo j) chondr-<br />

Task 17 (5 marks). Choose the English equivalents <strong>of</strong> the terms-elements:<br />

1) -tomia a) science, knowledge<br />

2) -ectomia b) s<strong>of</strong>tening<br />

11


3) -stomia c) reactivity <strong>of</strong> an<br />

organism<br />

4) -plegia d) displacement<br />

5) -penia e) artificial opening<br />

6) -algia f) paralysis<br />

7) -logia g) cutting<br />

8) -malacia h) pain<br />

9) -ergia i) extraction<br />

10) -ectopia j) lack<br />

Task 18 (5 marks). Find the terms which mean the inflammation:<br />

1) cystoplegia; 2) myelopathia; 3) poliomyelitis; 4) hidrosis; 5) glossitis; 6)<br />

rhinitis; 7) leucosis; 8) emcephalitis; 9) nephrolithiasis; 10) pyonephritis.<br />

Task 19 (10 marks). Form the terms with the given meaning:<br />

1. treatment with water:<br />

2. numerous inflammation <strong>of</strong> joints:<br />

3. muscle tumor:<br />

4. fungoid disease <strong>of</strong> the skin:<br />

5. prolapse <strong>of</strong> the liver:<br />

6. headache:<br />

7. break <strong>of</strong> vessels:<br />

8. eye bleeding:<br />

9. brain s<strong>of</strong>tening:<br />

10. white blood cell:<br />

Task 20 (5 marks). Find the clinical terms written without spelling mistakes:<br />

1) blepharorrhaphia; 2) artroplastica; 3) haepatitis; 4) metrorrhexis; 5) hydremia; 6)<br />

xantodermia; 7) pyelotomia; 8) cardiomyopathia; 9) stomatorhagia; 10)<br />

splanchnoptosis.<br />

12


Literature<br />

Basic.<br />

Demchenko O., Zakaliuzhnyi M. <strong>The</strong> Latin language and the fundamentals <strong>of</strong><br />

medical terminology. Manual for the students <strong>of</strong> <strong>higher</strong> <strong>educational</strong> <strong>establishment</strong>s<br />

with the English language <strong>of</strong> instruction. – Ternopil: Ukrmedknyha, 2004. – 284 p.<br />

<strong>The</strong> methodical instructions are compiled by L.I. Grishchenko.<br />

13

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!